Home

R&S VSE 3GPP FDD User Manual

1. The channels are sorted by code number 10 8 2 4 Power vs Slot When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 16 pairs of slots slot number of CPICH and level values are transferred lt slot number gt lt level value in dB gt for 16 slots 10 8 2 5 Result Summary When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the results of the result summary are output in the following order composite EVM gt peak CDE dB gt lt carr freq error Hz gt lt chip rate error ppm gt lt total power dB gt lt trg to frame us gt lt EVM peak channel gt lt EVM mean channel gt lt code class gt lt channel number gt lt power abs channel dB gt lt power rel channel dB referenced to CPICH or total power gt lt timing offset chips gt Q offset gt Q imbalance gt 10 8 2 6 Composite EVM RMS When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 15 pairs of slots slot number of CPICH and level values are transferred 10 8 2 7 10 8 2 8 10 8 2 9 10 8 2 10 Retrieving Results slot number gt level value in 96 for 15 slots Peak Code Domain Error When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 15 pairs of slots slot number of CPICH and level values are transferred slot number gt level value in dB for 15 slots Composite Constellation When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the real and the imaginary branc
2. esee PODE 2 uteri ete ad decidi rne a rece Reference frequency Relative code domain power zu Triggered CDP iniri tbe terre ene errem Measurement time Auto Settlngs eie rore ree P eerte 79 Measurement types CDA a 11 Measurements Interval a87 Sel ctinig eisi iironde tee e deer 48 Selecting remote sese 116 MIMO Channel types retener tete 38 Mapping to constellation points 38 Measurement mode 49 Remote control 120 Mini ouem 94 Marker positioning 94 Next iaces 94 blog EC 61 MKR gt ly 93 Mobile station see UE user equipment Modulation type a Multiple ZOON notte covey ce tt tenen N Next MIR ecco diaas an or N 94 Marker positlOnibig esci irt tn inet venie cis 94 Next Peak ui Marker positiOnilig cci eai ent b rp is 93 Noise Ie me 56 Oo Offset FREQUENCY it civic satis acd RR 63 Reference level siin msssiyusn ienen 58 TIMING PR 12 13 71 75 Options Electronic attenuation snesena 59 High pass filter Preamplifigr see eme dee eae tem ci Ba des Output ConfiguratiOD ais coepi ti Dee coe bn ea 55 Configuration remote sssssee 125 lINOISe SOULCB cedes n he dr e QU End eces br od ede 56 Settings Trigger Overview Configuration 3GPP FDD tetti tine 47 P
3. sse 85 Channel Selects a channel for the following evaluations e Code Domain Power Power vs Slot e Symbol Constellation e Symbol EVM Enter a channel number and spreading factor separated by a decimal point The specified channel is selected and marked in red if active If no spreading factor is specified the code on the basis of the spreading factor 512 is marked For unused channels the code resulting from the conversion is marked Example Enter 5 128 Evaluation Range Channel 5 is marked at spreading factor 128 30 ksps if the channel is active other wise code 20 at spreading factor 512 Remote command SENSe CDPower CODE on page 158 Slot Selects the slot for evaluation This affects the following evaluations see also chap ter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 14 e Code Domain Power Peak Code Domain Error Result Summary Composite Constellation Code Domain Error Power Channel Table Power vs Symbol Symbol Const Symbol EVM Bitstream Remote command SENSe CDPower SLOT on page 159 Frame To Analyze Defines the frame to be analyzed and displayed Remote command SENSe CDPower FRAMe VALue on page 158 Branch UE measurements only Switches between the evaluation of the and the Q branch in UE measurements Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CDPower Mapping on page 159 Details Branch UE measurements only By default the same bran
4. eee 153 General Channel Detection The following commands configure how channels are detected in general Useful commands for general channel detection described elsewhere CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 146 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 148 Remote commands exclusive to general channel detection CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COMPare esses nennen nnne 144 CONFigure WCDPowerLBTS CTABle TOFFSel 222 ipn ta terere t terna aA 145 SENSeJODPowenrlG TReShold 2 2 trea RE Ra e Paca teu aat One eo et ke Ie PERS RERDAR EE 146 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COMPare State This command switches between normal predefined mode and predefined channel table compare mode In the compare mode a predefined channel table model can be compared with the measurement in respect to power pilot length and timing offset of the active channels Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Comparision is a submode of predefined channel table measurement It only influen ces the measurement if the Channel Search Mode is set to Predefined see CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 146 If the compare mode is selected the power values pilot lengths and timing offsets are measured and are compared with the values from the predefined channel table The Timing Offset setting is disabled in this case The differences between the
5. 206 SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJUSt 0 c e eeeeeeteteteeeeeeeeeeeeee sees eee eesesaeaeaaaaaadaedeeteteeeeeeeees 207 ISENSGICUPOWERPRESGE id ent ete tet ee eaae cenae deuote ES 207 SENSe CDPowerUCPich CDDE 2 212 2222 oa acre en et oe eei Evae eo Y ERR Co ERR ZR AD IDAVSIS IIS PP Oi 208 SENSeJCDPowerUGPich PATTRERIL cerae tree uero nan atque ater eene ausu e ERE Rene aa aai 208 SENSe CDPower UCPich STATE 2 c ccceececeeeeeeee eee cee ae ae aes tnter nnn sensn tnter nnn re 208 CALCulate n FEED Evaluation This command selects the evaluation method of the measured data that is to be dis played in the specified window Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chapter 10 7 2 Working with Win dows in the Display on page 167 Parameters Evaluation Type of evaluation you want to display See the table below for available parameter values Example INST SEL BWCD Activates 3GPP FDD BTS mode CALC FEED CDP Selects the display of the code domain power Table 10 10 Evaluation parameter values for 3GPP FDD applications String Parameter Enum Parameter Evaluation XTIM CDP BSTReam BITStream Bitstream XTIM CDP COMP CONStel CCONst Composite Constellation lation XPOW CDEPower CDEPower Code Domain Error Power XPOW CDP CDPower Code Domain Power absolute scaling
6. SENSe CDPower NORMalize lt State gt If enabled the I Q offset is eliminated from the measured signal This is useful to deduct a DC offset to the baseband caused by the DUT thus improving the EVM Note however that for EVM measurements according to standard compensation must be disabled Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS CDP NORM ON Activates the elimination of the Q offset Manual operation See Compensate IQ Offset on page 86 SENSe CDPower PDISplay Mode This command switches between showing the absolute or relative power This parameter only affects the Code Domain Power evaluation Parameters Mode ABS REL ABSolute Absolute power levels RELative Power levels relative to total signal power or BTS application only CPICH channel power see SENSe CDPower PREFerence on page 161 RST ABS Example SENS CDP PDIS ABS Manual operation See Code Power Display on page 86 See Code Power Display on page 88 SENSe CDPower PDIFf State This command defines which slot power difference is displayed in the Power vs Slot evaluation Parameters State ON OFF ON The slot power difference to the previous slot is displayed OFF The current slot power of each slot is displayed RST OFF Example SENS CDP PDIF ON Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Show Differ
7. SENSe CDPower QINVert State This command inverts the Q branch of the signal Parameters ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP QINV ON Activates inversion of Q branch Manual operation See Invert Q on page 67 SENSe CDPower SBANd lt NORMal INVers gt This command is used to swap the left and right sideband Parameters lt NORMal INVers gt RST NORM Example CDP SBAN INV Switches the right and left sideband SENSe JAVERage lt n gt COUNt lt AverageCount gt SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt This command defines the number of measurements that the application uses to aver age traces In case of continuous measurement mode the application calculates the moving aver age over the average count In case of single measurement mode the application stops the measurement and cal culates the average after the average count has been reached Parameters lt SweepCount gt When you set a capture count of 0 or 1 the R amp S VSE performs one single measurement in single measurement mode In continuous measurement mode if the capture count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 measurements is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of measurements to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for its end Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Capture Average Count on page 67 Configuring
8. cer recen a a ai eet esie tete een ete ee Ad Eee ed A 1 2 1 A 1 2 2 A 1 2 3 Input amp Output Menu Menu Reference The Input amp Output menu provides functions to configure the input source frontend parameters and output settings for the measurement This menu is application specific Table 1 1 Input amp Output menu items for 3GP FDD Measurements Menu item Description Amplitude chapter 5 1 4 1 Amplitude Settings on page 57 Scale chapter 5 1 4 2 Y Axis Scaling on page 60 Frequency chapter 5 1 4 3 Frequency Settings on page 61 Trigger chapter 5 1 5 Trigger Settings on page 63 Input Source chapter 5 1 3 1 Input Source Settings on page 53 Output chapter 5 1 3 2 Output Settings on page 55 Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu provides access to most measurement specific settings as well as bandwidth sweep and auto configuration settings and the configuration Over view window This menu is application specific Table 1 2 Meas Setup menu items for 3GP FDD Measurements Menu item Description Select Measurement chapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 11 Capture Capture Average Count on page 67 Signal Description chapter 5 1 2 Signal Description on page 48 Scrambling Code chapter 5 1 2 2 BTS Scrambling Code on page 50 Signal Capture chapter 5 1 6 Signal Capture Data
9. 01 22 R amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 92 3 Marker Table Type Ref X Value Y Value M1 0 256 0 00 dB D2 N 415 512 1 94 dB D3 V 489 512 1 95 dB D4 V 266 512 2 00 dB Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 194 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 194 Peak Code Domain Error In line with the 3GPP specifications the error between the measurement signal and the ideal reference signal for a given slot and for all codes is projected onto the various spreading factors The result consists of the peak code domain error value per slot The measurement interval is the slot spacing of the CPICH timing offset of O chips ref erenced to the beginning of the frame Only the channels recognized as active are used to generate the ideal reference signal for the peak code domain error If an assigned channel is not recognized as active since pilot symbols are missing or incom plete the difference between the measurement and reference signal is very high This display is a bar diagram over slots The unit is dB The Peak Code Domain Error evalu ation covers the entire signal and the entire observation time 3G FDD BTS 1 Peak Code Domain Error 1Clw rm mw Fig 3 10 Peak Code Domain Error display for 3GPP
10. 4 117 feci 48 UE remote 122 UE Conrfiguratioh rtr nt tenen 51 Signal source i o E PEU 124 Sifigle ZOOM seisine rieira aeyaeee 80 Slope TAJJEF srira tar aian 65 135 SIOIS ires ten ete bed ote ee 34 Capture mode Channel CPICH Evaluation Evaluation range Number Power difference Softkeys Auto Scrambling Code usssss 51 78 Channel Detection Code Domain Settings ussssss 85 87 CPICH We E 94 Evaluation Range 2589 Marker Config 89 PCCPCH 11 94 Scale Config 22 60 Scrambling Code 250 Select MEAS ni n deat e ol date 46 Signal Capture i ertet rrt t 66 Signal Description 48 Sweep count 67 Synchronization 68 Trace Config 24 98 Trigger Gate Config wetted alco 63 Specifics for Config latioti c ettet tirer ees 48 Spreading factor su Relationship to code class sssini 33 Relationship to symbol rate esesssse 33 jode 36 Status Channels IDE e Status registers SGPP FDD nn ote e rn 203 CONTEMIS iseia Hen Cs dto ad Eie RUD 203 QuieryitiQi iere EO ete Dente rn 203 Suffixes COMMON saires naa eric eut eet Remote commands Sweep COUME ge CP 67 Symbol Constellation Evaltiatioh cond oett 27 Trace results 181 Symbol EVM e
11. Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range O sto 10 0s RST 0s TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Parameters soisel RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 64 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger
12. XPOW CDP ABSolute XPOW CDP RATio CDPower Code Domain Power relative scaling XTIM CDP MACCuracy CEVM Composite EVM XTIM CDP ERR CTABle CTABle Channel Table Use SENS CDP PDIS ABS REL subsequently to change the scaling Commands for Compatibility String Parameter Enum Parameter Evaluation XTIMe CDP CHIP EVM EVMChip EVM vs Chip XTIM CDP FVSLot FESLot Frequency Error vs Slot XTIMe CDP CHIP MAGNI MECHip Magnitude Error vs Chip tude XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain PCDerror Peak Code Domain Error XTIM CDPower PSVSlot PDSLot Phase Discontinuity vs Slot XTIMe CDPower CHIP PHA PECHip Phase Error vs Chip Se XTIM CDP PVSLot PSLot Power vs Slot absolute scaling XTIM CDP PVSLot ABSolute XTIM CDP PVSLot RATio PSLot Power vs Slot relative scaling XTIM CDP PVSYmbo PSYMbol Power vs Symbol XTIM CDP ERR SUMMary RSUMmary Result Summary XPOW CDP RATio SCONst Symbol Constellation XTIM CDP SYMB EVM SEVM Symbol EVM XTIMe CDPower SYM SMERror Symbol Magnitude Error Bol EVM MAGNitude XTIMe CDPower SYM SPERror Symbol Phase Error Bol EVM PHASe Use SENS CDP PDIS ABS REL subsequently to change the scaling SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJust This command adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the
13. tit reti dr rtateit dI Ioh ta a RSS 72 Restoring Default Tables ssesssssssssseseseseseeesee entente enitn nnns snnt nn 72 Predefined Tables The list shows all available channel tables and marks the currently used table with a checkmark The currently focussed table is highlighted blue Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle CATalog on page 146 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle CATalog on page 149 5 1 8 3 Code Domain Analysis Selecting a Table Selects the channel table currently focussed in the Predefined Tables list and com pares it to the measured signal to detect channels Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 148 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle SELect on page 150 Creating a New Table Creates a new channel table See chapter 5 1 8 4 Channel Details BTS Measure ments on page 74 For step by step instructions on creating a new channel table see To define or edit a channel table on page 96 Editing a Table You can edit existing channel table definitions The details of the selected channel are displayed in the Channel Table dialog box See chapter 5 1 8 4 Channel Details BTS Measurements on page 74 Copying a Table Copies an existing channel table definition The details of the selected channel are dis played in the Channel Table dialog box See chapter 5 1 8 4
14. 5 1 2 2 BTS Scrambling Code The scrambling code identifies the base station transmitting the signal You can either define the used scrambling code manually or perform a search on the input signal to detect a list of possible scrambling codes automatically Serambling COGS Im 51 Formal EXD GC REM 51 Serarmblimj GOUBS c serere nbn aan be cr a P GE 51 Autoseareh for Scrambling Coden 1 order iet oH itr Fas Pese ri IEEE PE BULL NaI 51 jou MET ER 51 Code Domain Analysis Scrambling Code Defines the scrambling code The scrambling codes are used to distinguish between different base stations Each base station has its own scrambling code Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe DVALue on page 121 Format Hex Dec Switch the display format of the scrambling codes between hexadecimal and decimal Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe DVALue on page 121 SENSe CDPower LCODe VALue on page 121 Scrambling Codes This table includes all found scrambling codes from the last autosearch sequence In the first column each detected scrambling code can be selected for export Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch LIST on page 119 Autosearch for Scrambling Code Starts a search on the measured signal for all scrambling codes The scrambling code that leads to the highest signal power is chosen as the new scrambling code Searching requires that the correct center frequency and level are set The s
15. aval Evaluation range 2 09 Inactive SHOWING cz ceca reete cebat rt ts 16 Mapping etm 13 ING of ACHVO i e Des tcc eeu Di dipsa 12 INUFTDOE 2 5 eodeni ae e o dee Naat de SEaTUS a iso ener Cenni E Chip rate error CHIPS Closing Windows remote sssssesssss 166 171 172 Code class Relationship to spreading factor 33 Relationship to symbol rate seesseessse 33 Code dormalti edicit ecu ate t denda 32 Code Domain Analysis S66 CDA EE 11 Code domain error power See CDEP idees nodes tet EC gesto 12 Code Domain Power 86 CDP hurt deett mediates ales 17 Code domain settings SOMKOY eei emet n e et 85 87 Code number see Channel number essessssseeeee 32 Code Power Display 86 88 CODES ES 32 Number per channel nente 33 Composite Constellation Evaluatiori ooi eit cde 18 Trace Tesults c inse oce ete tierra a 181 Composte EVM 1 rrt teen repere 12 Eval atiOrin teneri ctt entier eo aeree deen ens 19 Measurement example 104 Programming example we 212 Trace results 180 Compressed MOde rre enne 49 Conflict Channel table criss egt as eee ett ante 76 Constellation Parameter B our Ec ree tege 87 Constellation points Mapping in MIMO channels eeseees 38 Conventions SCPlIicOmtmland
16. 1 1 6 18 3 0 DPCH SF 128 16 32 64 76 8 see TS see TS 25 141 see TS 25 141 total 25 141 Table 4 9 Test model 2 Channel type Number of chan Power Level dB Spreading Timing offset nels code x256Tchip PCCPCH SCH 1 10 10 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 10 10 0 0 PICH 1 5 13 16 120 SCCPCH SF 256 1 5 13 3 0 DPCH SF 128 3 2x10 2x 10 1x 24 72 120 1 7 2 1 x 50 3 Table 4 10 Test model 3 Channel type Number of Power Level dB Spreading Timing offset channels 16 32 16 32 code x256Tchip PCCPCH SCH 1 12 6 7 9 9 11 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 12 6 7 9 9 11 0 0 PICH 1 5 1 6 13 18 16 120 SCCPCH 1 5 1 6 13 18 3 0 SF 256 DPCH SF 256 16 32 63 7 80 4 see TS see TS 25 141 see TS 25 141 total 25 141 Setup for Base Station Tests Table 4 11 Test model 4 Channel type Number of chan Power Level dB Spreading code Timing offset nels 96 16 32 x256Tchip 16 32 PCCPCH SCH 1 50 to 1 6 3 to 18 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 10 10 0 0 Table 4 12 Test model 5 Channel type Number of Power Level Spreading Timing offset channels dB code x256Tchip PCCPCH SCH 1 7 9 11 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 7 9 11 0 0 PICH 1 1 3 19 16 120 SCCPCH SF 256 1 1 9 19 3 0 DPCH SF 256 30 14 6 14 14 2 14 4 total see TS see TS see TS 25 141 25 141 25 141 HS_SCCH 2 4 total see TS see TS see TS 25 141 25 141 25 141 HS_PDSCH 8 4 2 63 6
17. Channel Details BTS Measurements on page 74 Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COPY on page 147 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COPY on page 149 Deleting a Table Deletes the currently selected channel table after a message is confirmed Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DELete on page 148 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DELete on page 149 Restoring Default Tables Restores the predefined channel tables delivered with the software Channel Table Settings and Functions Some general settings and functions are available when configuring a predefined channel table Code Domain Analysis Channel tables are configured in the Channel Table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Copy or Edit buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box PANN c ts 73 Pepe E 73 Adding a Channel iiec E tete Uto eae E 2 Y E 73 Deleting a Channel ospa e nte yr Ern RR a aa aa aa Raa 73 Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table 73 Sorting this e ae actor d retour tec re tre d ede ee o een etie dd gud 73 Cancelling Cornflgubatlot iioii cuire rei reed idees ez ca eet E eer esate is 73 SAVING Buon 74 Name Name of the channel table that will be displayed in the Predefine
18. Input and Output gt Trigger Trigger Source External Trigger 1 occ F o wm Replace the Result Summary display by a Composite EVM display a Select the if Delete icon from the Result Summary window title bar b Select the 6 1 Add Window icon from the toolbar c Select the Composite EVM result display 8 Input and Output gt Scale Auto Scale Once Results The following is displayed e Window 1 Code Domain Power of signal e Window 2 Composite EVM EVM for total signal R amp S VSE K72 Measurement Examples 8 4 3G FDD BTS 1 Code Domain Power 3G FDD BTS 3 Composite EVM 1Ciw 8 Fig 8 5 Measurement Example 3 Measuring the Composite EVM Measurement 4 Determining the Peak Code Domain Error The peak code domain error measurement is defined in the 3GPP specification for FDD signals An ideal reference signal is generated from the demodulated data The test signal and the reference signal are compared with each other The difference of the two signals is projected onto the classes of the different spreading factors The peak code domain error measurement is obtained by summing up the symbols of each difference signal slot and searching for the maximum error code Test setup 1 Connect the RF A output of the R amp S SMW200A to the input of the R amp S FSW 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference input REF OUT on the rear panel of t
19. LCODe TYPE on page 122 HSDPA UPA If enabled the application detects all QPSK modulated channels without pilot symbols HSDPA channels and displays them in the channel table If the type of a channel can be fully recognized as for example with a HS PDSCH based on modulation type the type is indicated in the table All other channels without pilot symbols are of type CHAN Remote command SENSe CDPower HSDPamode on page 118 Code Domain Analysis QPSK Modulation Only If enabled it is assumed that the signal uses QPSK modulation only Thus a special QPSK based synchronization can be performed and the measurement therefore runs with optimized speed Do not enable this mode for signals that do not use QPSK modulation Remote command SENSe CDPower QPSK on page 122 5 1 3 Data Input and Output Settings The R amp S VSE can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals s nput Source SENGS nonini eren etat em e ve Beza e dae 53 Output Selings uu iiie ieri nd ioni i i od d HE Ea et ca eels 55 5 1 3 1 Input Source Settings The R amp S VSE can control the input sources of the connected instruments e Rade Frequency Inplbl e mirer Fe ieee ania 53 VTO Fe MPU PEE 55 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the instrument in use is Radio Frequency Input Coupling I Q File Impedance High Pass Filte
20. Radio frequency RF eseis asiana 53 Instruments IMPUESOUNCC arerin 54 WAVE Q ain tH ta ee eb ter Boos 67 IQ offset Eliminating tis esc ers 86 88 160 K Keys MKR S c YY 93 L Lower Level Hysteresis esci iti rtt mti Ee n 80 M Mag Error vs Chip Evaluation rere rire 22 Trace resulls o rr rene nes 184 Mapping jehrhulM 13 Channel table Ed VQ DANGHES iiec reote ence ntt 77 Marker table Configuring certe rer ro nre re ers 92 Evaluation Method te 22 Markers Configuration remote irissen 193 197 Configuring u c nre rerit rre erra 90 Configuring softkey 89 Deactivating wi 92 Delta markers 2 91 MIMU ES 94 Minimum remote control eseeesss 197 Next minimum 94 Next minimum remote control Next peak ntn Next peak remote control Peak en dares Peak remote control sse POSITIONING osiinsa peer ence Querying position remote Search settings cna rere retener ces Setting to CPIOH incer rcr teo Setting to PCCPCH Settings remote State ssec Table teet Table evaluation method vius Uc 91 Maximum boi m 61 Measurement examples SGPP jb Composite EVM Incorrect center frequency Incorrect scrambling code
21. Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 4 on page 90 10 9 2 2 10 9 2 3 Analysis General Marker Settings EIJ VA Hpil Nep 197 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 92 Positioning the Marker This chapter contains remote commands necessary to position the marker on a trace e Positioning Normal MarkefS soriire aad aa aai a Ea 197 e Positioning Delta Makers itte ena ene tte e eee et ida 199 Positioning Normal Markers The following commands position markers on the trace CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtION CPICH cccccssccceseccecesceesseseesesececeanceesseseeeaeees 197 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtION PCCPCH 0cccccecccessscecesscceceecceeseseeeeaeeeeceneeeeaes 198 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiIMUM LEFT ccccsssccceecccecescecessececeacceeseseeseeeeeeceneeeaes 198 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiIMUM NEXT ccceccccceescceceececeessceceacecesseeeseeeceeseneeeees 198 CALCulate l
22. This command sets the delta marker to the position of the PCCPCH This command is only available in code domain power and code domain error power evaluations Example CALC DELT2 FUNC PCCP CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 93 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 94 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion R amp SSVSE K72 Remote Commands for 3GPP FDD Measurements Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher min
23. contain pilot symbols Optionally all QPSK modulated channels can also be recog nized without pilot symbols see HSDPA UPA on page 49 In addition the channel must exceed a minimum power in order to be considered active see Inactive Channel Threshold BTS measurements only on page 70 In UE measurements a channel is considered to be active if a minimum signal noise ratio is maintained within the channel e Comparison with predefined channel tables The input signal is compared to a predefined channel table All channels that are included in the predefined channel table are considered to be active 4 2 BTS Channel Types The 3GPP FDD standard defines various BTS channel types Some channels are mandatory and must be contained in the signal as they have control or synchroniza tion functions Thus these channels always occupy a specific channel number and use a specific symbol rate by which they can be identified Control and synchronization channels The 3GPP FDD BTS application expects the following control and synchronization channels for the Code Domain Power measurements User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 35 BTS Channel Types Table 4 2 Common 3GPP FDD BTS control channels and their usage Channel type Description PSCH Primary Synchronization Channel The Primary Synchronization Channel is used to synchronize the signal in the case of SCH synchronization It is a non orthogonal channel Only the power of th
24. 0 Alternative scrambling codes can not be detected Therefore the range for detection is 0x0000 Ox1FFOh where the last digit is always O If the search is successful PASS a code was found and can be queried using SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch LIST Parameters Status PASSed Scrambling code s found FAlLed No scrambling code found Example SENS CDP LCOD SEAR Searches the scrambling code that leads to the highest signal power and returns the status of the search Usage Query only Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Autosearch for Scrambling Code on page 51 SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch LIST This command returns the automatic search sequence see SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch IMMediate on page 119 as a comma separated list of results for each detected scrambling code Return values lt Code1 gt Scrambling code in decimal format Range 16 n with n 0 511 lt Code2 gt Scrambling code in hexadecimal format Range 0x0000h Ox1FFOh where the last digit is always 0 lt CPICHPower gt Highest power value for the corresponding scrambling code Example SENS CDP LCOD SEAR LIST Result 16 0x10 18 04 32 0x20 22 87 48 0x30 27 62 64 0x40 29 46 Explanation in table below Usage Query only Mode BTS application only Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Manual operation See Scrambling Codes on page 51 Table 10 1
25. CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 193 6 5 2 General Marker Settings General marker settings are defined in the Marker Config tab of the Marker dialog box Marker Table Auto O o mo L Off TEIN Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Auto Default Up to two markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTABle on page 197 6 5 3 Marker Search Settings Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings These settings are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu or in the Search tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search tab Select the Marker Config icon from the toolbar From the Marker menu select Marker Then select the Search tab Markers Search Mode for Next Peak ssssssssssssssssesssesenenhenen nnne ess sa sensns sss asse sa
26. DPCH in compressed mode Compressed mode channels usually do not transmit valid symbols in all slots There are different lengths of the transmitting gap One to fourteen slots can be Switched off in each frame In some cases outside the gap the symbol rate is increased by 2 to ensure a constant average symbol rate of this channel In any case all of the transmitted slots contain a pilot sequence defined in the 3GPP speci fication There are different types of compressed mode channels To evaluate compressed mode channels the associated measurement mode needs to be activated see Compressed Mode on page 49 CPR TPC DPCH in compressed mode where TPC symbols are sent in the first slot of the transmitting gap CPR SF 2 DPCH in compressed mode using half spreading factor SF 2 to increase the symbol rate of the active slots by two CPR SF 2 TPC DPCH in compressed mode using half spreading factor SF 2 to increase the symbol rate of the active slots by two where TPC symbols are sent in the first slot of the transmitting gap HS PDSCH HSDPA High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel The High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel HSDPA does not contain any pilot symbols It is a channel type that is expected in code classes lower than 7 The modulation type of these channels can vary depending on the selected slot HSPDSCH QPSK QPSK modulated slot of an HS PDSCH channel HSPDSCH 16QAM 16QAM modulated slot of an HS PDSCH
27. Description of query results in example Code dec Code hex CPICH power dBm 16 0x10 18 04 32 0x20 22 87 48 0x30 27 62 64 0x40 29 46 SENSe CDPower MIMO State Activates or deactivates single antenna MIMO measurement mode Channels that have modulation type MIMO QPSK or MIMO 16QAM are only recog nized as active channels if this setting is ON For details see MIMO on page 49 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS CDP MIMO ON Mode BTS application only Manual operation See MIMO on page 49 SENSe CDPower PCONtrol Position This command determines the power control measurement position An enhanced channel search is used to consider the properties of compressed mode channels Parameters Position SLOT PILot SLOT The slot power is averaged from the beginning of the slot to the end of the slot PILot The slot power is averaged from the beginning of the pilot sym bols of the previous slot to the beginning of the pilot symbols of the current slot RST PILot 10 6 1 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Example SENS CDP PCON SLOT Switch to power averaging from slot start to the end of the slot An enhanced channel search is used to consider the properties of compressed mode channels SENS CDP PCON PIL Switch to power averaging from the pilot symbols of the previous slot number to the start of the pilots of the
28. ERERR TE UR KM ERR ex REX EATE 179 LEE Uc Tm 179 e Code Domain Emor POWOt tere ior trn ive i rad ta nen es decere ER REIS 179 LEN POWer VS SlOW as cscace che cesses ienn a a a a aa ea Taaa Naa Eaa 180 LIEB EET AER 180 e Composite EVNMATIMS ect acute dte ce uto c ent endo agen nants 180 e Peak Code Domain EO indie ti cespite ELO HE OE AT aaa 181 e Composite Constellation cccccscccscsssssessesesesecececececenececestaceeacatanassscsseeseseeees 181 e Powervs Symbol cree ninani nnna epiac Found Ree psa d do oo gode e Ed 181 e Symbol ConstellatlOn uiii prier erroe roo ER Fedex Etna a P eo ER Te ene De Pavo IS VETE ERE Apo YER E 181 GYmMDOEVM EIEM 182 LE E EE E E DL SL 182 Eiuegusncy Erot vS S OE nt ertet eter de e de e eed ege edet Ea ease 183 e Phase Discontinulty vs Slot eint ee tedio Hd 183 ONLUS 183 Louie 184 LIBE S0 5 109097 50 1 o E 184 e Symbol Magnitude EFOL eoe een ERR EN a TRRRRRYM aE 184 e Symbol Phase EMON o petet pe qe a RR R RR ERE ini aa EPAS AY NDA LEER XRRAR ARA 184 10 8 2 1 10 8 2 2 10 8 2 3 Retrieving Results Code Domain Power When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 5 values are transmitted for each channel the code class e the channel number the absolute level the relative level the timing offset For details on these parameters see TRACe lt
29. GLOBal ADD WINDow command Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result Y 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAY out WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtifyl WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY WIND2 IDEN Queries the name of the result display in window 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow n REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix n from the display in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command To remove a window in a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal REMove WINDow command Configuring the Result Display Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window 2 Usage Event LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the a
30. Gee 51 78 Auto po E 78 Meastime mode crine cn eco cene 79 Remote CODO pase Recortes e i ieu d 155 Autosearch Channel detection cnet 35 Scrambling code AVetage COUN wits acetone rrr eer rne eo n peer ra Avg Power Inact Chan rne renes 12 AVG REDE ai etie tren PR EE PER Eee aaa 12 B Base station See pq 7 Base transceiver station HI pq 7 Bitstream Evaluation Parameter Trace Fesults ic e c cep eoe 182 Branch Evaluation range cicer nennen es 84 85 Capture LENGEN cearnan 67 Carrier frequ mncy erfO masea ne E E 12 Relationship to synchronization mode 13 CDA Analysis settings BTS ss 85 Analysis settings UE se 87 Channel results CCOMMOLIGUNG e coctaa se Configuring remote sse Evaluation settings BTS remote m Evaluation settings UE remote Parameters xs ea dern teet ee xen oS eee recentes Performing IReSUILS anaE A a tu s E nz Evaluation MACS MOSS s c ir retro EEE CDP Channel Dardmeler suoi eoo erect oer rtt repeto rt ka Ghanneltable us cocer eorr rore re n dee Evaluations aso eei tors cott eerta xci xe ERR IEE Measurement example Programming example eere Trace results Center frequency Measurement example eer
31. Low state of a transmitted bit 1 High state of a transmitted bit 6 Bit of a symbol of a suppressed slot of a DPCH in Compressed Mode DPCH CPRSD 7 Bit of a switched off symbol of an HS PDSCH channel 8 Fill value for unused bits of a lower order modulation symbol in a frame containing higher order modulation 9 Bit of a suppressed symbol of a DPCH e g TFCI off Bits per symbol NBitPersymb 2 4 6 Symbols per slot Nsymb siot 10 2 8 Code Class Symbols per frame Nsymb Frame 15 Nsymb_siot 150 2 8 Code Class Number of bits Npgit Nsymb_Frame Neitpersymb_MAx Format 1 6QAM Bitoo Bito Bito2 Bito3 Bit o Bit Bit 2 Bit 3 j Bitysymb_Frame o BitNsymb_Frame 1 Bilysymp Frame 2 Bitysymb_Frame 3 Format 64QAM Bitoo Bito Bitos Bitos Bitog Bitos Bitio Bit Bits Bits Bitia Bitis Bitysymb_Frame o Bilusymp Frame 1 Bilysymp Frame 2 Bilusymp Frame 3xBitusymp Frame 4Bllysymp Frame 5 Frequency Error vs Slot When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 15 pairs of slot slot number of CPICH and values are transferred slot number value in Hz Phase Discontinuity vs Slot When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 15 pairs of slot slot number of CPICH and values are transferred slot number value in deg EVM vs Chip When the trace data for this evaluation is queried a list of vector error values of all chips at
32. P CPICH Synchronization mode PGGPGH enn fici PCDE EVval atiOri critic roe ecce Ante ers 23 Measurement example 106 Programming example 2 rri caters 213 Trace Fesuls na ct rette eter 181 Peak Code Domain Error See PODE idc tese iere e tei recita peres 23 Peak search MOOG m es 93 Peaks Marker positiohilig entrer een innt 94 Mo mM S 93 Performing 3G FDD meas rement mens 95 Phase Discontinuity vs Slot EVvalilatlOR c cadit trem tti uad Trace results Phase Error vs Chip Evaluatio 5 2 5 2 ce 2 ade es 24 Trace results 184 PIG Hleri itra iae US eal 37 Pilot bits 34 35 Channel table wild T7 NUMBER OT ete ctecercvesnistevcaveu ites aO enee a 13 iilo EM C 17 e D C 12 Power Channels retener cedo eee rra tentato x retta 13 CONTON isie a r eaaa eae a ata 35 Difference to previous slot seesessssss 86 Displayed mtn tente tree teh ri en 9 In ctive channels eiecti 12 RRETERENCE iio ecd e t e etd reta 86 88 Power vs Slot Evaluation Trace results Power vs Symbol Evaluation Trace results Preamplifier SEWING M 60 Predefined tables Channel detection 1 trem 35 Presetting Channels 2 121 eret vet ees ton cvi 48 207 insieme O 65 Programming exa
33. Parameters Type WCDPower Code domain power measurement This selection has the same effect as command INSTrument SELect MWCD RST WCDPower Example CONF WCDP MS MEAS TAE Mode UE application only 10 5 10 6 10 6 1 Restoring the Default Configuration Preset Manual operation See Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table on page 73 Restoring the Default Configuration Preset SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute cccccceceeeeeeceeeeeeee eae aea eee eene enne nnne nnne 117 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default software settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 48 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Align ment Error Measurements The following commands are required to configure Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error measurements LEE Signal DestiptOM serseri nA aeee EEEREN saat AERENCA TR 117 e Configuring the Data Input and Output sessssseeenenn ms 123 e Frontend Configuratii 4 erac crei edet e dort ore dE IR 125 e Configuring Triggered Measurements esee enne 132 Sighal apti os ie lee aree Dre tto t e erede nte a cv dua 138 e Syn
34. QAM modulation UE measurements the modulation type of the selected channel Valid entries are e BPSK for channels on I branch e BPSK Q for channels on Q branch e NONE for inactive channels 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis The captured I Q data can be evaluated using various different methods without having to start a new measurement The selected evaluation also affects the results of the trace data query see chap ter 10 8 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 178 rcl Em 15 Channel Table et eee I E EER Reb ee x base eeEERON ER ERR ERR SE aaa MANUI KRRERER RE EROR Ex EEEEER 15 E Table Conf EO issmecieot attin merde t ach edi 16 Code Dora P OW nce es etuer e exor eR eer tn ag deest erae an dao e cas aes 17 Code Domain Error POWDOLE 2 2 2 1 922 HR ERI Aa e vay re P Dre EET a RE Pd 18 Composite Constellation seessessssssssssseseeseeeee enne 18 Composto E VM cte eater rehenes teca ta Ee dene eben vt 19 EVM ECC UE 20 Frequency Emor vS SO o tr E hte davis esti nex raider dead rb rs etd 21 Mag Error 15 E 22 Market Tablg et tete a us ta t APO NR Rege bed E x seceded 22 Peak Code Domain ERO carus cera cta Fe reni ra rec EH ta E eve i rete E rg 23 Phase Discontinuity vs Slot 1 eeclesie tenen nae beant tnn tnnt khan inten Een 24 Phase Emor RD o 24 POWER VS SOG m tees 26 Power
35. Range 2 to 9 lt CodeNumber gt Range 0 to 511 lt UseTFCI gt 0 1 0 not used 1 used lt TimingOffset gt Step width 256 for code class 9 512 Range 0 to 38400 lt PilotLength gt code class 9 4 code class 8 2 4 8 code class 7 4 8 code class 5 6 8 code class 2 3 4 16 lt ChannelType gt For the assignment of channel types to parameters see table 10 2 10 6 7 5 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Status 0 not active 1 active lt CDP gt for queries CDP relative to total signal power for settings CDP absolute or relative Example CONF WCDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name CONF WCDP CTAB DATA 98 0 0 0 0 0 1 04 00 8 1 0 0 0 0 14 0 00 L 0 256 9 0 1 0 00 Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Channel Type on page 74 See Channel Number Ch SF on page 75 See Use TFCI on page 75 See Timing Offset on page 75 See Pilot Bits on page 75 See CDP Relative on page 75 See Status on page 76 Configuring Channel Details UE Measurements The following commands are used to configure individual channels in a predefined channel table in UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA essssssssseee einen eene ennt enses Eaa ai 153 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA HSDPZcch essen 154 CONFigure WCDPower MS GTABle EDATa 121i liter taeda dto 154 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa EDPO
36. TRACE 1 4 User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 28 R amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display Symbol Magnitude Error The Symbol Magnitude Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result is one symbol magnitude error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive values of symbol magnitude error indicate a symbol magnitude that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol magnitude errors indicate a symbol magnitude that is less than the ideal one The symbol magnitude error is the difference between the magnitude of the received symbol and that of the reference symbol related to the magnitude of the reference symbol 3G FDD BTS 4 Symbol Magnitude Error Symb 0 1 Symb symb 9 Fig 3 18 Symbol Magnitude Error display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SMERror see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Symbol Phase Error The Symbol Phase Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result is one symbol phase error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive val ues of symbol phase error indicate a symbol phase that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol phase errors indicate a symbol phase that is less than the ideal one User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 29 R amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display 3 2 3G FDD BTS 1 Symbol Phase Error Symb 0 1 Symb Symb
37. TRACe lt n gt DATA lt MeasMode gt This command queries the trace data from the measurement Depending on the selected measurement mode the results vary For a detailed description of the results see the individual commands Query parameters lt MeasMode gt ATRACE1 ABITstream1 CTABLe CEVM CWCDp FINAL1 LIST PWCDp TPVSlot TRACE1 The data type defines which type of trace data is read Example TRAC DATA ATRACE Usage Query only TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE1 This command returns the trace data Depending on the evaluation the trace data for mat varies The channels are output in a comma separated list in ascending order sorted by code number i e in the same sequence they are displayed on screen Retrieving Results For details see chapter 10 8 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 178 Return values lt CodeClass gt 2 9 Code class of the channel lt ChannelNo gt 0 511 Code number of the channel lt AbsLevel gt dBm Absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel slot lt RelLevel gt Relative level of the code channel at the selected channel slot referenced to CPICH or total power lt TimingOffset gt 0 38400 chips Timing offset of the code channel to the CPICH frame start The value is measured in chips The step width is 256 chips in the case of code class 2 to 8 and 512 chips in the case of code class 9 Examp
38. VSE K72 TRIGGER INPUT connector LAY REPL 2 XTIM CDP MACC Replace the second measurement window Result Summary by Composite EVM evaluation DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the Composite EVM measurement INIT CONT OFF Stops continuous sweep SWE COUN 100 Set the number of sweeps to be performed to 100 INIT WAI Start a new measurement with 100 sweeps and wait for the end TRAC2 DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the trace data of the composite EVM measurement Result 0 000000000 5 876136422E 001 1 000000000 5 916179419E 001 2 000000000 5 949081182E 001 Ul Essa Table 10 13 Trace results for Composite EVM measurement CPICH Slot number EVM 0 5 876136422E 001 1 5 916179419E 001 2 5 949081182E 001 Measurement 4 Determining the Peak Code Domain Error RST Reset the instrument INST CRE REPL IQ Analyzer BWCD BTSMeasurement Replace the default channel by a 3GPP FDD BTS channel named BTSMeasurement DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 10 Set the reference level to 10 dBm FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz Set the center Frequency to 2 1175 GHz TRIG SOUR EXT Set the trigger source to the external trigger TRIGGER INPUT connector LAY REPL 2 XTIM CDP ERR PCD Replace the second measurement window Result Summary by the Peak Code Domain Error evaluation DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE Optimize the scaling of the y a
39. a at obra ETAT XR YEARS PETeY CH btaneansdibenisanas 92 amp Place New Marker Activates the next currently unused marker and sets it to the peak value of the current trace in the current window m Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 4 When you select the arrow on the marker selection list in the toolbar or select a marker from the Marker Select Marker menu the marker is activated and an edit dialog box is displayed to enter the marker position X value To deactivate a marker select the marker name in the marker selection list in the tool bar not the arrow to display the Select Marker dialog box Change the State to Off Marker 1 is always the default reference marker for relative measurements If activa ted markers 2 to 4 are delta markers that refer to marker 1 These markers can be converted into markers with absolute value display using the Marker Type function Markers Several markers can be configured very easily using the Marker dialog box see chapter 6 5 Markers on page 89 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 194 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 194 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 194 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 195 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 195 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative on page 196 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y on page 196 Se
40. amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display TEE Mag Error vs Chip The Magnitude Error versus chip display shows the magnitude error for all chips of the selected slot Note In UE measurements if the measurement interval Halfslot is selected for eval uation 30 slots are displayed instead of the usual 15 see Measurement Interval on page 87 The magnitude error is calculated as the difference of the magnitude of the received signal to the magnitude of the reference signal The reference signal is estimated from the channel configuration of all active channels The magnitude error is related to the square root of the mean power of reference signal and given in percent Isl Ix 0 MAG r e100 N 2560 ke 0 N 1 lIs an x Zoll N Ral where MAG magnitude error of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slot n index number for mean power calculation of reference signal 3G FDD BTS 2 Magnitude Error vs Chip Chip 0 256 Chip Fig 3 9 Magnitude Error vs Chip display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MECHip see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers um PE E A AN NNUS User Manual 1176 8968 02
41. are QPSK modulated and some are switched OFF If one or more slots of the frame are QPSK modulated and no slot is 16QAM modulated 2 bits per symbol are transmitted If no power is transmitted in a slot 2 entries per symbol of value 7 are transmitted Example 3 Some slots of a DPCH are suppressed because of compressed mode transmission The bits of the suppressed slots are marked by the digit 6 In this case always 2 bits per symbol are transmitted TRACe lt n gt DATA ATRace1 This command returns a list of absolute Frequency Error vs Slot values for all 16 slots based on CPICH slots In contrast to the TRACE1 parameter return value absolute values are returned Return values lt SlotNumber gt lt FreqError gt Example Usage Mode Manual operation Retrieving Results Slot number Absolute frequency error Default unit Hz TRAC2 DATA ATR Returns a list of absolute frequency errors for all slots in window 2 Query only BTS application only See Frequency Error vs Slot on page 21 TRACe lt n gt DATA CTABle This command returns the pilot length and the channel state active inactive in addi tion to the values returned for TRACE lt t gt This command is only available for Code Domain Power or Channel Table evaluations see chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 14 Return values lt CodeClass gt lt ChannelNo gt lt AbsLevel gt
42. bit stream of one slot is transfer red Each symbol contains two consecutive bits in the case of a QPSK modulated slot and 4 consecutive bits in the case of a 16QAM modulated slot One value is transfer red per bit range 0 1 The number of symbols is not constant and may vary for each sweep Individual symbols in the bit stream may be invalid depending on the channel type and the bit rate symbols without power The assigned invalid bits are marked by one of the digits 6 7 or 9 The values and number of the bits are as follows without HS DPCCH channels see SENSe CDPower HSDPamode on page 118 Table 10 7 Bit values and numbers without HS DPCCH channels Unit Value range 0 1 6 9 0 Low state of a transmitted bit 1 High state of a transmitted bit 6 Bit of a symbol of a suppressed slot of a DPCH in Compressed Mode DPCH CPRSD 9 Bit of a suppressed symbol of a DPCH e g TFCI off Bits per slot NaitPerSymb 2 Number of symbols Ngymp 10 2 8 Code Class Number of bits Nai Ngymb Naitpersymb Format Bitoo Bito Bityo Bity Bitao Bitoi Bitusymb 0 Bitusymb 4 10 8 2 13 10 8 2 14 10 8 2 15 Retrieving Results The values and number of the bits including HS DPCCH channels see SENSe CDPower HSDPamode on page 118 are as follows Table 10 8 Bit values and numbers including HS DPCCH channels Unit D Value range 0 1 6 7 8 9 0
43. command returns the peak list For each peak the following results are given Return values lt Freq gt Peak frequency lt Level gt Peak level lt DeltaLevel gt Delta between current peak level and next higher peak level Example TRAC2 DATA FINall Returns a list of peak values Usage Query only Mode BTS application only TRACe lt n gt DATA PWCDp This command returns the pilot length in addition to the values returned for TRACE lt t gt This command is only available for Code Domain Power or Channel Table evaluations see chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 14 Return values lt CodeClass gt 2 9 Code class of the channel lt ChannelNo gt 0 511 Code number of the channel Retrieving Results lt AbsLevel gt dBm Absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel slot lt RelLevel gt Relative level of the code channel at the selected channel slot referenced to CPICH or total power lt TimingOffset gt 0 38400 chips Timing offset of the code channel to the CPICH frame start The value is measured in chips The step width is 256 chips in the case of code class 2 to 8 and 512 chips in the case of code class 9 lt PilotLength gt 0 2 4 8 16 The length of the pilot symbols According to the 3GPP stand ard the pilot length range depends on the code class Default unit symbols Example TRAC DATA PWCDp Returns a list of channel information
44. determine the time offset between the signals of both antennas of a base station Measurement Setup for Two Antennas in a Base Station ssussss 45 Time Alignment Error Measurements 4 8 1 Measurement Setup for Two Antennas in a Base Station The antenna signals of the two BTS transmitter branches are fed to the analyzer via a combiner Each antenna must provide a common pilot channel i e P CPICH for antenna 1 and P CPICH or S CPICH for antenna 2 The Time Alignment Error Mea surement setup for one base station using an R amp S FSW shows the measurement setup ext reference signal EXT REF i i 600 on an F Frame Trigger Antenna 1 TX signal Combiner Antenna 2 TX signal Fig 4 1 Time Alignment Error Measurement setup for one base station using an R amp S FSW Synchronization check A synchronization check is performed for both antennas which must have the result Sync OK to ensure a proper TAE result Synchronization problems are indicated by the messages No antenna 1 sync No antenna 2 sync and No sync Errors can also be read remotely via bits 1 and 2 of the Sync status register see chapter 10 10 Querying the Status Registers on page 203 5 1 Code Domain Analysis Configuration The 3GPP FDD applications provide several different measurements for signals according to the 3GPP FDD application The main and default measurement is Code Domain Analysis Fu
45. enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 202 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on page 201 Multiple Zoom In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 203 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00OM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 202 Restore Original Display Q 1 1 Time Alignment Error Measurements Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M STATe on page 202 single zoom DISPlay WINDow n Z00M MULTiple czoom STATe on page 203 for each multiple zoom window X Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates any zoom mode Selecting a point in the display no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M STATe on page 202 single zoom DISPlay WINDow n 2Z00M MULTiple czoom STATe on page 203 for each multiple zoom window 5 2 Time Alignment Error Measurements To perform a Time Al
46. function is currently not available Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on the instrument in use on or off if available External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the instrument in use itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 125 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of variable trigger input output connectors on the instrument in use Which output settings are available depends on the type of instrument in use For details see the instrument s documentation Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the instrument in use No further trigger parameters are available for the connector Output The instrument in use sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGget porl t LEVel on page 137 OUTPut TRIGger lt port t gt DIRection on page 137 5 1 4 5 1 4 1 Code Domain Analysis Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the instrument in use triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the instrument in use is in Ready Armed for trigger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERat
47. itti iita tei 110 Common Suffixes 1 ete SEANAR 115 Activating 3GPP FDD Measurements eese nennen 116 Selecting a Measurement seseseeeeeenee eene nennen nennen rnnt nnns 116 Restoring the Default Configuration Preset eene 117 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements dederis ite dno ado cits ent Deco Tv Le Eis Fee ERR XE a esau EIE tunes CHE dE dudes viuensues ehdstecestiissuasassts 117 Configuring the Result Display eeeeeeeeennennennn nnne nnn 163 Retrieving Results nennen rennes in seno tirria sar frr nean Dra iEn uu RD Unas 174 ANALYSIS 192 Querying the Status Registers seeeeesssseseseseseeeeeneen enne enne nnne 203 Commands for Compatibility eee 206 Programming Examples R amp S VSE K72 eese 209 i M ed 215 Menu Reference 215 Reference of Toolbar Functions eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneneennn nennen nennen nnns 219 List of Remote Commands 3GPP FDD 224 i 228 User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 4 About this Manual 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This R amp S VSE 3GPP FDD User Manual provi
48. lt RelLevel gt lt TimingOffset gt lt PilotLength gt lt ActiveFlag gt Example 2 9 Code class of the channel 0 511 Code number of the channel dBm Absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel slot Relative level of the code channel at the selected channel slot referenced to CPICH or total power 0 38400 chips Timing offset of the code channel to the CPICH frame start The value is measured in chips The step width is 256 chips in the case of code class 2 to 8 and 512 chips in the case of code class 9 The length of the pilot symbols According to the 3GPP stand ard the pilot length range depends on the code class Range 0 2 4 8 16 Default unit symbols 0 1 Flag to indicate whether a channel is active 1 or not 0 TRAC DATA CTABle Returns a list of channel information including the pilot length and channel state Retrieving Results Usage Query only Manual operation See Channel Table on page 15 See Code Domain Power on page 17 TRACe lt n gt DATA CWCDp This command returns additional results to the values returned for TRACE lt t gt The result is a comma separated list with 10 values for each channel the channels are output in ascending order sorted by code number i e in the same sequence they are displayed on screen This command is only available for Code Domain Power or Channel Table evaluations see chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods f
49. measured and the prede fined values are visualized in the corresponding columns of the CHANNEL TABLE evaluation see Channel Table on page 15 The following columns are displayed in the channel table e PilotL is the substraction of PilotLengthMeasured PilotLengthPredefined PwrRelis the substraction of PowerRelMeasured PowerRelPredefined e T Offs is the substraction of TimingOffsetMeasured TimingOffsetPredefined For non active channels dashes are shown Parameters State ON OFF ON predefined channel table compare mode OFF normal predefined mode RST OFF Example CONF WCDP CTAB COMP ON Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Comparing the Measurement Signal with the Predefined Channel Table on page 71 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle TOFFset Mode This command specifies whether the timing offset and pilot length are measured or if the values are taken from the predefined table Parameters lt Mode gt PRED MEAS PRED The timing offset and pilot length values from the predefined table are used MEAS The timing offset and the pilot length are measured by the appli cation The channel configuration is specified via the predefined channel table Example CONF WCDP CTAB TOFF MEAS Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Timing Offset Reference on page 71 10 6 7 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements SENSe CDPower ICTReshold lt Th
50. name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values Windowlndex Index number of the window Example LAYout GLOBal ADD WINDow IQ 1 RIGH Spectrum FREQ Adds a new window named Spectrum with a Spectrum display to the right of window 1 Example LAYout GLOBal IDENtify IQ Analyzer Spectrum Result 2 Window index is 2 Usage Query only LAYout GLOBal REMove WINDow lt ChannelName gt lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window Usage Event Configuring the Result Display LAYout GLOBal REPLace WINDow lt ExChannelName gt lt WindowName gt lt NewChannelName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout GLOBal ADD WINDow command Parameters ExChannelName String containing the name of the channel in which a window is to be replaced The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window To determine the name and index
51. oN Oo a Ff Settings in the R amp S VSE 1 File gt Preset gt All 2 Measurement Group Setup Replace Channel gt 3GPP FDD BTS 3 Input and Output gt Amplitude Reference level 10 dBm 4 Input and Output gt Frequency Center frequency 2 1175 GHz 5 Meas Setup gt Scrambling Code 0000 6 Input and Output gt Trigger Trigger Source External Trigger 1 7 Input and Output gt Scale Auto Scale Once Results The following is displayed e Window 1 Code Domain Power of signal e Window 2 Result Summery including the Trigger to Frame i e offset between trigger event and start of 3GPP FDD BTS frame R amp S9SVSE K72 Measurement Examples 0 3GFDD BTS 1 Code Domain Power idw FDD BTS 2 Result Summary Fig 8 4 Measurement Example 2 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power The repetition rate of the measurement increases considerably compared to the repeti tion rate of a measurement without an external trigger 8 3 Trigger Offset A delay of the trigger event referenced to the start of the 3GPP FDD BTS frame can be compensated by modifying the trigger offset gt Setting in the R amp S VSE Input and Output gt Trigger Trigger Offset 100 us The Trigger to Frame parameter in the Result Summary Window 2 changes Trigger to Frame 100 us Measurement 3 Measuring the Composite EVM The 3GPP specification defines the composite EVM meas
52. of all active windows use the LAYout GLOBal CATalog WINDow query lt NewChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel for which a new win dow will be created lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window Note that the window type must be valid for the specified chan nel lt NewChannelName gt See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY GLOB REPL WIND IQ Analyzer 1 AnalogDemod MTAB Replaces the I Q Analyzer result display in window 1 by a marker table for the AnalogDemod channel 10 7 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel To configure the layout of windows across measurement channels use the chap ter 10 7 1 Global Layout Commands on page 163 ES doti ADD WINDOW On 168 LAY ou CATalog WINDOWI rette Re cg trei p Eae OR Ree tee RR e RR chedeamastacea lana 170 LAYout IDENtify WINDOW riirii idana aiaiai aiad airaa i aaaeaii 170 LAYoutREM
53. operations printing or setting up general parameters For a description of these functions see the Data Management chapter in the R amp S VSE User Manual Menu item Correspond Description ing icon in toolbar Save im Saves the current software configuration to a file Recall ad Recalls a saved software configuration from a file Saves the recorded I Q data from a measurement channel to a file Save IQ Recording Recall IQ Recording Loads the recorded l Q data from a file Measurement Group gt Configures measurement channels and groups gt New Group Inserts a new group in the measurement sequence gt New Measurement Inserts a new channel in the selected group Channel Replaces the currently selected channel by the selected applica tion gt Replace Measure ment Channel Menu Reference Menu item Correspond Description ing icon in toolbar gt Delete Current Mea Deletes the currently selected channel surement Channel gt Measurement Group Displays the Measurement Group Setup tool window Setup Instruments gt Configures instruments to be used for input to the R amp S VSE soft ware gt New Creates a new instrument configuration gt Search Searches for connected instruments in the network gt Delete All Deletes all current instrument configurations gt Setup Hide
54. reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode Analysis Return values Result Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 22 See b Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 4 on page 90 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 4 on page 90 See Marker State on page 91 See Marker Type on page 91 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all delta markers off lt m gt is irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Analysis Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker posit
55. search mode Predefined Compares the input signal to the predefined channel table selected in the Predefined Tables list Code Domain Analysis Auto Detects channels automatically using pilot sequences Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 146 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle STATe on page 148 Comparing the Measurement Signal with the Predefined Channel Table If enabled the 3GPP FDD application compares the measured signal to the predefined channel tables In the result summary only the differences to the predefined table set tings are displayed Remote command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COMPare on page 144 Timing Offset Reference Defines the reference for the timing offset of the displayed measured signal Relative to The measured timing offset is shown in relation to the CPICH CPICH Relative to If the predefined table contains timing offsets the delta between the Predefined defined and measured offsets are displayed in the evaluations Table Remote command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle TOFFset on page 145 5 1 8 2 Channel Table Management Channel tables are managed in the Channel Detection dialog box which is displayed when you select the Channel Detection button in the configuration Overview iE mt 71 SEE UM 72 Greaung a Now Table icone ettet tet ea edt eeu ee ot od taedet 72 ZDE o m 72 Copying a Table UE 72 Deleung s Tabl
56. specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 134 Trigger Offset Trigger Settings Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Code Domain Analysis offset gt 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger If supported by the instrument in use Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 133 Slope Trigger Settings For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 135 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of variable trigger input output connectors on the instrument in use Which output settings are available depends on the type of instrument in use For details see the instrument s documentation Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the instrument in use No further trigger parameters are available for the connector Output The instrument in use sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 137 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 137 Output
57. tabs Code Domain Analysis The 3GPP FDD standard defines two different CPICH patterns for diversity antenna 1 and antenna 2 The CPICH pattern used for synchronization can be defined depending on the antenna standard configuration or fixed to either pattern independantly of the antenna user defined configuration Remote command SENSe CDPower ANTenna on page 118 CPICH Mode Antenna Antenna2 Defines whether the common pilot channel CPICH is defined by its default position or a user defined position P CPICH Standard configuration CPICH is always on channel 0 S CPICH User defined configuration Enter the CPICH code number in the S CPICH Code Nr field Remote command SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna STATe on page 142 S CPICH Code Nr Antenna1 Antenna2 If a user defined CPICH definition is to be used enter the code of the CPICH based on the spreading factor 256 Possible values are 0 to 255 Remote command SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna CODE on page 141 S CPICH Antenna Pattern Defines the pattern used for evaluation Remote command SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna PATTern on page 141 5 1 8 Channel Detection The channel detection settings determine which channels are found in the input signal e General Channel Detection Setlihigs ertet entia te tias 69 e Channel Table Management ccc cccceccteeeeecccaeeeeseccenaeeeseceaaeeeeeneceeeeeeeneee
58. the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 80 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 80 See Restore Original Display on page 80 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 81 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA eese 202 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe essssseeeeeeeneneneenens 203 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm ome 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 SSS gt SS a User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 202 10 10 Querying the Status Registers Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Defaul
59. the selected slot is returned 22560 values The values are calculated as the square root of the square difference between the received signal and the reference sig Retrieving Results nal for each chip normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot 10 8 2 16 Mag Error vs Chip When the trace data for this evaluation is queried a list of magnitude error values of all chips at the selected slot is returned 22560 values The values are calculated as the magnitude difference between the received signal and the reference signal for each chip in 96 and are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot 10 8 2 17 Phase Error vs Chip When the trace data for this evaluation is queried a list of phase error values of all chips in the selected slot is returned 22560 values The values are calculated as the phase difference between the received signal and the reference signal for each chip in degrees and are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot 10 8 2 18 Symbol Magnitude Error When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the magnitude error in 96 of each symbol at the selected slot is transferred The number of the symbols depends on the spreading factor of the selected channel NOFSymbols 10 2 9 CodeClass 10 8 2 19 Symbol Phase Error When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the phase error in degrees of each symbol at the se
60. value e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Common Suffixes 10 1 6 3 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 10 1 2 Long
61. vs SVmbOlL sn cu users reci tees nente a mter under rsidvctte Aa 26 Result SU mpmalty acri cecue de adie a ates redierat nen aene EEN AEEA RANEE AEE EAEE AESA EAEEREN 27 ymbpblGonstellatl gr coca es ctim te reta ee ree Te y ce reg een last 27 Symbol E VM iot ip e A 28 Symbol Magnitude EOT 5 2 2 ertet ertet eee rne tote ta Doe etta bea mnt tu 29 leucas 29 R amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display Bitstream The Bitstream evaluation displays the demodulated bits of a selected channel for a given slot Depending on the symbol rate the number of symbols within a slot can vary from 12 min to 384 max For QPSK modulation a symbol consists of 2 bits I and Q For BPSK modulation a symbol consists of 1 bit only used 2 Bitstream Table Fig 3 1 Bitstream display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements TIP Select a specific symbol using a marker for the display Enter the symbol number as the x value The marker is moved to the selected symbol which is highlighted by a blue circle The diagram footer indicates e Channel format type and modulation type HS PDSCH only Number of data bits D1 D2 Number of TPC bits TPC Number of TFCI bits TFCI Number of pilot bits Pil Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH BITS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe lt n gt DATA ABITstream Channel Table The Channel Table evaluation displays the detected channels and the results of the code domain power mea
62. x E a a aa 65 EEUU TYPE TRENT R aaa nedehsaaabdlSiaecsbescatiats 65 E E 65 L Pulse anillo oem tt E Eta tp tite Ra nd ps dendi tn 66 L Send TRO ised tendu Sires tales od adus Qood Fina ian 66 Trigger Settings The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 135 Free Run Trigger Source Trigger Settings No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 135 External Trigger lt X gt Trigger Source Trigger Settings Data acquisition starts when the signal fed into the specified input connector or input channel of the instrument in use meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 64 Note Which input and output connectors are available depends on the connected instrument For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the instrument s Getting Started manual Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 TRIG SOUR EXT4 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 135 Trigger Level Trigger Settings Defines the trigger level for the
63. 01 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MlINimum RIGHE eseesessseessissseseseeeee eene nnne nenne nnne nnne nnn 201 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eese 201 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X CALCulate lt n gt DEL l amarkeremo XRELaltive creencias rie ctp copie edet gea eee 196 CAL Gulate r DEETamarkerstmo Y necerais trier eta er ce ce ean 196 GAL Culatesn DELE Tamarkersim gt S TATe anico cnin aerario e gere eter ehh Cea AENEA ERT 195 CAL Culate lt n gt zz c 206 CAL Culatesn gt MARKer lt m gt AOR Pais viscis lorcet ence e o Edere ee essi cori Sean EVE v a De RE ERIS 193 CALCulate n2 MARKer m FUNCtion CP Ch eeesssesesssssesesessese eene nennen aE 197 CALCulatesn MARKer m FUNCtion PCOPCh cco reete ether cete tte tpe gta cages 198 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion TAERror RESUIt 0 cccccceccececseeeseneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseeaeeesenaeenteneeeess 174 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion WCDPower MS RESUIE essen 176 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion WCDPower BTS RESUIt sse 174 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT GALGCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGEIL itte nnt ht rre een nent ret ns CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimumg PEAK cesses eene nen
64. 131 INPut EATT on page 131 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well The parameters Input Coupling and Impedance are identical to those in the Input settings See Radio Frequency Input on page 53 Preamplifier Input Settings If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed on the instrument in use a preampli fier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power Depending on the connected instrument different settings are available See the instrument s documentation for details Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 129 INPut GAIN VALue on page 130 5 1 4 2 Y Axis Scaling The vertical axis scaling is configurable In Code Domain Analysis the y axis usually displays the measured power levels Code Domain Analysis Y Maximum 0 0 dB Y Minimum 70 0 dB Auto Scale Once Restore Scale Specifics for 1 Code Domain Power 7 aR CUT ESTILO EL coca ceci ine eve ea vet eu eed vied denn ede Fera eb xS 61 Auto Seale ONCE asradi unian ELE 61 Restore Scale WIFIGQW ntt t te re Mee etd ce b ge ce e au edd 61 Y Maximum Y Minimum Defines the amplitude range to be displayed on the y axis of the evaluation diagrams Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum on page 128 DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe MINimum on pa
65. 180 to 180 um E A AN NU User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 24 R amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display CHIP MAGNITUDE CHIP EVM 4 X Recdived JM Reference Chip P j j te Y j i CHIPPHASE RROR i I i i n amp i i j i j i i I i i T i Fig 3 12 Calculating the magnitude phase and vector error per chip PHI gs gx N 2560 ke 0 N 1 where PHI phase error of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slot x phase calculation of a complex value 3G FDD BTS 4 Phase Error vs Chip Chip 0 256 Chip Chip 2559 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PECHip see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 25 R amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display Power vs Slot The Power vs Slot evaluation displays the power of the selected channel for each slot The power is displayed either absolute or relative to the total power of the signal or to the CPICH channel 3G FDD BTS 3 Power vs Slot Fig 3 13 Power vs Slot Display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements If a timing offset of the selected channel in relation to the CPICH channel occurrs the power is calculated and displayed per ch
66. 2 DPCCH and up to 6 DPDCH Channel type Number of channels Symbol rate Spreading code s Mapping DPCCH 1 15 ksps 0 Q DPDCH 1 960 ksps 1 I DPDCH 1 960 ksps 1 Q DPDCH 1 960 ksps 3 l DPDCH 1 960 ksps 3 Q DPDCH 1 960 ksps 2 l DPDCH 1 960 ksps 2 Q Table 4 15 Channel configuration 3 DPCCH up to 6 DPDCH and 1 HS DPCCH The channel configu On HS DPCCH is added to each channel table ration is as above in table 4 2 Number of Symbol rate all DPDCH Symbol rate Spreading code Mapping HS DPCCH DPDCH HS DPCCH HS DPCCH 1 15 960 ksps 15 ksps 64 Q 2 1920 ksps 15 ksps 1 l 3 2880 ksps 15 ksps 32 Q 4 3840 ksps 15 ksps 1 l 5 4800 ksps 15 ksps 32 Q 6 5760 ksps 15 ksps 1 l Table 4 16 Channelization code of HS DPCCH Nmax dpdch as defined in subclause 4 2 1 Channelization code C 1 Con 256 64 2 4 6 Con 256 1 3 5 Con 256 32 4 7 Setup for User Equipment Tests This section describes how to set up the R amp S VSE for 3GPP FDD UE user equipment tests As a prerequisite for starting the test the instrument in use must be correctly set up and connected to the AC power supply as described in the analyzer s Getting Star ted manual Furthermore the 3GPP FDD UE application must be installed Standard Test Setup e Connect antenna output or Tx output of UE to RF input of the analyzer via a power attenuator of suitable at
67. 2 Welcome to the 3GPP FDD Applications eee 7 2 4 Starting the 3GPP FDD Application eeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeenee eren 7 2 2 Understanding the Display Information esee 8 3 Measurements and Result Display e eene 11 3 1 Code Domain Analysis eee nnn nnn nn nnn EKRANA ENS 11 3 2 Time Alignment Error Measurements eese 30 4 Meas rement BaslC8 iocis spakkiena see una nion oua Dac Eae guERuc5n P pru Un E EC RUE puEEdS 32 AA Channel DetectiOn eerie treten itn ne tont nx anna as nun advies VERS ERR RR Eu noa an rra 35 4 2 BTS Channel Typ6Gs neant nennen iranan EEEE 35 4 3 UE Channel Typoes iren iere neuter rina sena nnns scusa PETEAREN RAER 39 4 4 3GPP FDD BTS Test Models seesseeeseseeeeeeeneennnnnn nennen nnn enitn nennen nnn 40 4 5 Setup for Base Station Tests ccccesseeeeeeceee eee eeeeeeeseeneeseeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeaneeseeeeeeeeneees 41 4 6 3GPP FDD UE Test Models 1er rene nennen nocent u unn tea aa Rami anne ica sessed 42 4 7 Setup for User Equipment Tests cc cccseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeseeeeeeeeeeeeesseeneneeseeeeees 43 4 8 Time Alignment Error Measurements eee 44 EE Dip eT 46 5 1 Code Domain Analysis ueeseeseissssess
68. 40 SENSE AVERA ge Nna COME rct aec xe EEA Rois Rape eue nee x XE ARAT 140 SENSe SWEep COUNL ecce tetntteneneteetettet tert teet t tests Dos 140 SENSe CDPower BASE lt BaseValue gt This command defines the base of the CDP analysis Parameters lt BaseValue gt SLOT FRAMe SLOT Only one slot of the signal is analyzed FRAMe The complete 3GPP frame is analyzed RST FRAMe Example CDP BASE SLOT Manual operation See Capture Mode on page 67 SENSe CDPower FILTer STATe State This command selects if a root raised cosine RRC receiver filter is used or not This feature is useful if the RRC filter is implemented in the device under test DUT Parameters State ON 1 If an unfiltered signal is received normal case the RRC filter should be used to get a correct signal demodulation OFF 0 If a filtered signal is received the RRC filter should not be used to get a correct signal demodulation This is the case if the DUT filters the signal RST 1 Example SENS CDP FILT STAT OFF Manual operation See RRC Filter State on page 67 SENSe CDPower IQLength lt CaptureLength gt This command specifies the number of frames that are captured by one sweep Parameters lt CaptureLength gt Range 1 to 100 RST 1 Example SENS CDP IQLength 3 Manual operation See Capture Length Frames on page 67 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements
69. 6 5 3 Marker Search Settings on page 92 A 1 2 5 Limits Menu The Limits menu does not contain any functions for 3GP FDD measurements A 2 Reference of Toolbar Functions Common functions can be performed via the icons in the toolbars Individual toolbars can be hidden or displayed Reference of Toolbar Functions Hiding and displaying a toolbar 1 Right click any toolbar or the menu bar A context menu with a list of all available toolbars is displayed 2 Select the toolbar you want to hide or display A checkmark indicates that the toolbar is currently displayed The toolbar is toggled on or off Note that some icons are only available for specific applications Those functions are described in the individual application s User Manual General toolbars The following functions are generally available for all applications Main toolbar For a description of these functions see the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual Table 1 5 Functions in the Main toolbar Icon Description rz Overview Displays the configuration overview for the current measurement channel P2 Save Saves the current software configuration to a file amp i Recall Recalls a saved software configuration from a file Save I Q recording Stores the recorded l Q data to a file Recall l Q recording Loads recorded l Q data from a file Print immediately prints the current display screenshot a
70. 63 4 63 2 total see TS see TS see TS 25 141 16QAM 25 141 25 141 4 5 Setup for Base Station Tests This section describes how to set up the analyzer for 3GPP FDD BTS tests As a pre requisite for starting the test the instrument in use must be correctly set up and con nected to the AC power supply as described in the instrument s Getting Started man ual Furthermore the 3GPP FDD BTS application must be available Standard Test Setup Connect the antenna output or Tx output of the BTS to the RF input of the ana lyzer via a power attenuator of suitable attenuation The following values are recommended for the external attenuator to ensure that the RF input of the analyzer is protected and the sensitivity of the analyzer is not reduced too much Max power Recommended ext attenuation 255 to 60 dBm 35 to 40 dB 250 to 55 dBm 30 to 35 dB 245 to 50 dBm 25 to 30 dB 240 to 45 dBm 20 to 25 dB 235 to 40 dBm 15 to 20 dB 4 6 3GPP FDD UE Test Models Max power Recommended ext attenuation 230 to 35 dBm 10 to 15 dB 225 to 30 dBm 5 to 10 dB 220 to 25 dBm 0 to 5 dB lt 20 dBm 0 dB e For signal measurements at the output of two port networks connect the reference frequency of the signal source to the rear reference input of the analyzer EXT REF IN OUT e To ensure that the error limits specified by the 3GPP standard are met the ana lyzer should use an exte
71. 68 02 01 34 R amp SSVSE K72 Measurement Basics pom P M P m s Power control While the spreading factors are adjusted for each frame i e every 10 ms the power levels for transmission must be adapted to the current requirements such as interfer ence much more dynamically Thus power control bits are transmitted in each slot allowing for much higher change rates As the CPICH channel continuously transmits the same data the power level need not be adapted Thus the power control bits can lead to a timing offset between the CPICH slots and other channel slots 4 1 Channel Detection The 3GPP FDD applications provide two basic methods of detecting active channels Automatic search using pilot sequences The application performs an automatic search for active DPCH channels through out the entire code domain The search is based on the presence of known symbol sequences pilot symbols in the despread symbols of a channel A data channel is considered to be active if the pilot symbols as specified by the 3GPP FDD standard are found at the end of each slot In this mode channels without or with incomplete pilot symbols are therefore not recognized as being active An exception to this rule is seen in the special channels PICH and SCCPCH which can be recognized as active in the automatic search mode although they do not
72. 6QAM Constellation point normalized Bit sequence 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 38 UE Channel Types Constellation point normalized Bit sequence 4 3 UE Channel Types The following channel types can be detected in 3GPP FDD uplink signals by the 3GPP FDD UE application Control channels The 3GPP FDD UE application expects the following control channels for the Code Domain Power measurements Table 4 6 Common 3GPP FDD UE control channels and their usage Channel type Description DPCCH The Dedicated Physical Control Channel is used to synchronize the signal It carries pilot symbols and is expected in the Q branch at code class 8 with code number 0 This channel must be contained in every channel table HSDPCCH The High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel for HS DCH is used to carry control information CQI ACK NACK for downlink high speed data chan nels HS DCH It is used in HSDPA signal setup The symbol rate is fixed to 15ksps The code allocation depends on the number of active DPCH The HS DPCCH can be switched on or off after the duration of 1 5 frame or 3 slots or 2ms Power control is applicable too EDPCCH The Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel is used to carry control information for uplink high speed data channels EDPDCH It is used in HSUPA signal setup The symbol rate is fixed to 15ksp
73. 9 Fig 3 19 Symbol Phase Error display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SPERror see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Time Alignment Error Measurements Time Alignment Error Measurements are a special type of Code Domain Analysis used to determine the time offset between the signals of both antennas of a base station They are only available in 3GPP FDD BTS measurements The result is displayed numerically on the screen a graphical result is not available QD Synchronization errors A synchronization check is performed for both antennas which must have the result Sync OK to ensure a proper TAE result Synchronization problems are indicated by the messages No antenna 1 sync No antenna 2 sync and No sync For more information see chapter 4 8 Time Alignment Error Measurements on page 44 Evaluation Methods For Time Alignment Error measurements the following evaluation methods are availa ble Result List Indicates the time delay in chips of the signal at antenna 2 relative to the signal at antenna 1 User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 30 R amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display 1Time Alignment Error ERAN oro eT dizi Ke uie P GoW KO S10 0M ITE PA h0 010 010 01010 010 010 1010100101010 DN Time delay of antenna 2 signal relative to antenna 1 signal Fig 3 20 Time Alignment Error display for 1 base stati
74. AB Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow TAB The new window is added as a new tab in the specified existing window string Name of the channel for which a new window is to be added string Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result LAYout GLOBal ADD WINDow IQ Analyzer l RIGH IQ Analyzer2 FREQ Adds a new window named Spectrum with a Spectrum display to the right of window 1 in the channel IQ Analyzer Query only Table 10 5 lt WindowType gt parameter values for 3GPP FDD application Parameter value Window type BITStream Bitstream CCONst Composite Constellation CDPower Code Domain Power CDEPower Code Domain Error Power CEVM Composite EVM CTABle Channel Table EVMChip EVM vs Chip FESLot Frequency Error vs Slot Configuring the Result Display Parameter value Window type MECHip Magnitude Error vs Chip MTABle Marker table PCDerror Peak Code Domain Error PDSLot Phase Discontinuity vs Slot PECHip Phase Error vs Chip PSLot Power vs Slot PSYMbol Power vs Symbol RSUMmary Result Summary SCONst Symbol Constellation SEVM Symbol EVM SMERror Symbol Magnitude Error SPERror Symbol Phase Error LAY out GLOBal CATalog
75. ABITst ream parameter evaluates all symbols of one entire frame vs only one slot for TRAC DATA TRAC The values 7 and 8 are only used in case of a varying modulation type of an HS PDSCH channel In this case the number of bits per symbol NBitPerSymb varies as well However the length of the transmitted bit vector NBit depends only on the maxi mum number of bits per symbol in that frame Thus if the modulation type changes throughout the frame this will not influence the number of bits being transmitted see examples below Example LAY REPL 2 XTIM CDP BSTReam Sets the evaluation for window 2 to bit stream TRAC2 DATA ABITstream Returns the bit streams of all 15 slots in window 2 one after the other Usage Query only Manual operation See Bitstream on page 15 Examples for bits 7 and 8 for changing modulation types Example 1 Some slots of the frame are 64QAM modulated other are 16QAM and QPSK modula ted and some are switched OFF NONE If one or more slots of the frame are 64QAM modulated six bits per symbol are transmitted and if the highest modulation order is 16QAM four bits per symbol are transmitted In any slot of the frame with lower order modulation the first two or four of the four or six bits are marked by the number 8 and the last bits represent the transmitted symbol If no power is transmitted in a slot four or six entries per symbol of value 7 are transmitted Example 2 Some slots of the frame
76. Acquisition on page 66 Sync chapter 5 1 7 Synchronization BTS Measurements Only on page 68 Channel Detection chapter 5 1 8 Channel Detection on page 69 Code Domain Settings chapter 6 2 Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS Measurements on page 85 Evaluation Range chapter 6 1 Evaluation Range on page 83 Overview chapter 5 1 1 Configuration Overview on page 47 Trace Menu The Trace menu provides access to trace specific functions See chapter 6 4 Traces on page 88 Reference of Toolbar Functions This menu is application specific Table 1 3 Trace menu items for 3GP FDD Measurements Menu item Description Clear Write Defines the trace mode see Trace Mode on page 89 Max Hold Min Hold Average View Trace Opens the Traces configuration dialog box see chapter 6 4 Traces on page 88 A 1 2 4 Marker Menu The Marker menu provides access to marker specific functions This menu is application specific Table 1 4 Marker menu items for 3GP FDD Measurements Menu item Correspond Description ing icon in toolbar Select marker lt x gt M1 wa I Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 4 on page 90 All Markers Off wy All Markers Off on page 92 CPICH Marker To CPICH on page 94 PCCPCH Marker To PCCPCH on page 94 Marker a chapter 6 5 1 Individual Marker Settings on page 90 Search chapter
77. Ble SELect cnet retener oh n nere rr aA GONFigure WCDPower MS CTABIe S TATe nct etre thereto t rere er t i rns CONFigure WCDPower MS MEAS UreMe Miri icccicenccscestersgencencen ont ono epa stre ku te patte PERS ANSETE EA Ee EGRE CONFigure WCDPower BTS ASCale S TATe tnr trn nn t rre ene GONFigure WGDPower BTS CTABle CATalog rni eon neret egent rne tnra orte 146 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COMMent GONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COMMPAare 2 iter ennt norant nn ehe tp terna GONFigure WCDPowerEBTS E GC TABIC COPY cs ea ceo reet ne naeh i tera ra rone ex ex eremum erret GONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA nici te i ret rtr rtt ete ness GONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABIe DEbLete rrr nr nbn rt ena GONFigure WCDPowerEBTS E C TABIe NAME nnno rte t o rere ea A TE AEE EEEE CONFigure WCDPower BTS GCTABle SEL6cL trt rtt rne nter eere CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle TOFFset CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle S TATe cune uae thru tree S ere nee eu crines GONFigure WCDPower BTS MCARrier STATe e int nnt nit rtp tnter denen n e GONFigure WCDPower BTS MEAGSu remenlt 2 ottenere on trier rrr n enr ira DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE NS OUNCE T DISPlay MTAB BISPlayEWINDowsn SEbL 6ct rrr t rrr t erret tt tenni TENA rera PH X eed DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE DIS
78. CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 150 Example CONF WCDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name to be deleted CONF WCDP CTAB DEL Deletes the table Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Deleting a Table on page 72 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle SELect lt FileName gt This command selects a predefined channel table file for comparison during channel detection Before using this command the RECENT channel table must be switched on first with the command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 146 Parameters lt FileName gt RST RECENT Example CONF WCDP CTAB ON Switches the channel table on CONF WCDP CTAB SEL CTAB 1 Selects the predefined channel table CTAB 1 Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Selecting a Table on page 72 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle STATe State This command switches the channel table on or off When switched on the measured channel table is stored under the name RECENT and is selected for use After the RECENT channel table is switched on another channel table can be selected with the command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle SELect on page 150 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF WCDP CTAB ON Mode UE application only Manual operation See Using Predefined Channel Tables on page 70 CONFigure
79. Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements 10 6 6 Synchronization For BTS tests the individual channels in the input signal need to be synchronized to detect timing offsets in the slot spacings These commands are described here they are only available in the 3GPP FDD BTS application Useful commands for synchronization described elsewhere SENSe CDPower ANTenna on page 118 Remote commands exclusive to synchronization SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna CODE esssssssssseseeenen nennen 141 SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna PATTern eeeeeessseseeee eene nnn 141 SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT lt antenna gt STAT cccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaeaaeenenenenes 142 SENSe CDBPower STYPB red tectorio dre eie sere eee ca Ped isa dpa DRY ga 142 SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT lt antenna gt CODE lt CodeNumber gt This command sets the code number of the user defined CPICH used for signal analy sis Note this command is equivalent to the command SENSe CDPower UCPich CODE on page 208 for antenna 1 Suffix lt antenna gt 1 2 Antenna to be configured Parameters lt CodeNumber gt Range 0 to 225 RST 0 Example SENS CDP UCP ANT2 CODE 10 Mode BTS application only Manual operation See S CPICH Code Nr on page 69 SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT lt antenna gt PATTern Pattern This command defines which pattern is used for signal analysis for the user
80. DA measurements the unit should not be changed as this would lead to useless results Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level The instrument in use automatically determines the optimal reference level for the cur rent input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized This function is not available on all supported instruments Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 158 RF Attenuation Defines the attenuation applied to the RF input of the R amp S VSE Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware
81. FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PCDerror see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 23 R amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display T Phase Discontinuity vs Slot The Phase Discontinuity vs Slot is calculated according to 3GPP specifications The phase calculated for each slot is interpolated to both ends of the slot using the fre quency shift of that slot The difference between the phase interpolated for the begin ning of one slot and the end of the preceding slot is displayed as the phase discontinu ity of that slot 3G FDD BTS 2 Phase Discontinuity vs Slot Fig 3 11 Phase Discontinuity vs Slot display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PDSLot see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Phase Error vs Chip Phase Error vs Chip activates the phase error versus chip display The phase error is displayed for all chips of the slected slot Note In UE measurements if the measurement interval Halfslot is selected for eval uation 30 slots are displayed instead of the usual 15 see Measurement Interval on page 87 The phase error is calculated by the difference of the phase of received signal and phase of reference signal The reference signal is estimated from the channel configu ration of all active channels The phase error is given in degrees in a range of
82. FFOh where the last digit is always O Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch IMMediate on page 119 Code Domain Analysis Auto Scale Window Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings in the currently selected window No new measurement is performed Auto Scale All Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings in all displayed diagrams No new mea surement is performed f Auto Settings Configuration For some automatic settings additional parameters can be configured The Auto Set Config dialog box is available when you select the icon from the Auto Set toolbar Meas Time Value 1 0 ms Hysteresis Upper Value 1 0 dB Lower Value 1 0 dB Automatic Measurement Time Mode and Value Auto Settings Configuration To determine the optimal reference level automatically a level measurement is per formed on the instrument in use You can define whether the duration of this measure ment is determined automatically or manually To define the duration manually enter a value in seconds Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 157 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 156 Upper Level Hysteresis Auto Settings Configuration When the reference level is adjusted automatically us
83. G FDD BTS 1 Code Domain Power FDD BTS 2 Result Summary General Results Frame 0 CPICH Slot 0 ror r Inact Chan nnels Ch 0 256 Fig 8 1 Measurement Example 1 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power 8 1 1 Synchronizing the Reference Frequencies The synchronization of the reference oscillators both of the DUT and the R amp S FSW strongly reduces the measured frequency error Test setup gt Connect the reference input REF INPUT 1 20 MHZ on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference output REF OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S SMW200A coaxial cable with BNC connectors Settings on the R amp S SMW200A The settings on the R amp S SMW200A remain the same Settings in the R amp S VSE In addition to the settings of the basic test activate the use of an external reference gt Instruments gt Info amp Settings gt Reference Reference Frequency Input Exter nal Reference 10 MHz The displayed carrier frequency error should be lt 10 Hz User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 100 R amp SSVSE K72 Measurement Examples pem P u aa 8 1 2 Behaviour with Deviating Center Frequency In the following the behaviour of the DUT and the R amp S FSW with an incorrect center frequency setting is shown 1 Tune the center frequency of the signal generator in 0 5 kHz steps 2 Watch the measurement results in the R amp S VSE e Upto 5 kHz a frequency error causes n
84. H Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 152 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 153 CDP Relative Code domain power relative to the total power of the signal Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 152 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 153 Status Indicates the channel status Codes that are not assigned are marked as inactive channels Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 152 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 153 Code Domain Analysis 5 1 9 Automatic Settings Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S VSE automatically according to the current measurement settings In order to do so a measurement is performed The duration of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually Automatic settings are available from the Auto Set toolbar Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All 78 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level sesseeeeses 78 Autosearch for Scrambling Code nir aeree rte ret ac eru nad 78 FUG SCAG VV ING OW E 79 aeie es pol Mm 79 Alo Salings CONNGQUrANOM As coude irren A De ed 79 L Automatic Measurement Time Mode and Value ssssseeees 79 E Upper Level Nvsbefaalt cas cascsnsaascsstaai
85. Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 79 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S VSE or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 59 10 6 9 Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which data is evaluated in the result display SENS amp CDPowWer CODE unco ini retento tee dne edax c do Ea au a a uero ec Eve Ee eds 158 SENSeJOGDPowerFRAMeL VALue niae noe pota a aE 158 SENSe COP OWERSWON E 159 SENSE TCDF Ower MAPPING edere eec nag nancial nese xu eua Rae 159 GALGCulate n CDPower Mappihg 2 22 2 sessed reset nete pote a Leva vache eu Rb c Da U ERAN 159 SENSe CDPower CODE lt CodeNumber gt This command sets the code number The code number refers to code class 9 spreading factor 512 Parameters lt CodeNumber gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 Example SENS CDP CODE 30 Manual operation See Channel on page 83 SENSe CDPower FRAMe VALue lt Frame gt This command defines the frame to be analyzed within the captured data Configuri
86. N Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center frequency on page 62 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 125 Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 62 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span In time domain zero span measurements the center frequency is coupled to the RBW Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency OFFSet O
87. N s ATE EE DR a RE EE RE FA Dag 120 SENSe CDPower ANTenna Mode This command activates or deactivates the antenna diversity mode and selects the antenna to be used Parameters Mode OFF 1 2 RST OFF Example CDP ANT 1 Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Antenna Diversity on page 50 See Antenna Number on page 50 See Antenna1 Antenna2 on page 68 SENSe CDPower HSDPamode State This command defines whether the HS DPCCH channel is searched or not Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The high speed channels can be detected A detection of the modulation type QPSK 16QAM is done instead of a detection of pilot symbols OFF 0 The high speed channel can not be detected A detection of pilot symbols is done instead a detection of the modulation type QPSK 16QAM RST 1 Example SENS CDP HSDP OFF Manual operation See HSDPA UPA on page 49 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements SENSe CDPower L CODe SEARch IMMediate This command automatically searches for the scrambling codes that lead to the high est signal power The code with the highest power is stored as the new scrambling code for further measurements Searching requires that the correct center frequency and level are set The scrambling code search can automatically determine the primary scrambling code number The secondary scrambling code number is expected as
88. Play WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE essere 127 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum cesses enne 128 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MINimum esee 128 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDlVision esses enne 128 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel esee eerte 129 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet ssssseeeeeeeneeenenenee 129 DISPlayEWINDBowsri TRAGe t S l AT6 eite rout tnnt nr rr neto teen 193 DISPlay WINDowsn ZOOM AREA tnnt tr rr nene nere rt icr cr een ri ix erre ra ra n 201 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA esseesseeeeeeeeeneen nennen eeennrenrennnnin 202 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe seesseesseeeeeeneenee nennen nennen nnne 203 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe FOR Math DATA secs sescees cose INPUGAT TOMUAUOMN e M INPUtATTen atiom AUTO M INPUT GOW PING rrenen TEENE E ANSETE E ATN E ETTE EEO ET EEN INPO EAT Toreosssnsurggivsn Ause r eT EAr EE Eae a a aa eaaa naeia INPUtEATTAUTO C INPut EATT STATe INPut FIETer HPASSESTATe er rrr tnr ere n en rne tne re ner e rne re rt ree een INPUtFILT SR dE AP do si
89. Power LCODe VALue on page 121 SENSe CDPower HSDPamode on page 118 Remote commands exclusive to describing UE signals SENSe ICDPower CODe TYBE i iro datio tou a uro nee gate so ek el eae p ua CH ME ae ai 122 I SENSe JCDPoWeEOPESR p a said A ERERCHARA REPAIR LUIS REASN AASE 122 SENSe ODPOWeISEACIOE 11i tr th tpe tore ebbe ee rae E ah rage dede po an ce Ebo ied 122 SENSe CDPower LCODe TYPE Type This command switches between long and short scrambling code Parameters Type LONG SHORt RST LONG Example CDP LCOD TYPE SHOR Mode UE application only Manual operation See Type on page 52 SENSe CDPower QPSK State If enabled it is assumed that the signal uses QPSK modulation only Thus no syn chronization is required and the measurement can be performed with optimized set tings and speed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Mode BTS application only Manual operation See QPSK Modulation Only on page 53 SENSe CDPower SFACtor lt SpreadingFactor gt This command defines the spreading factor The spreading factor is only significant for Peak Code Domain Error evaluation Parameters SpreadingFactor 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 RST 512 Example SENS CDP SFACtor 16 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements 10 6 2 Configuring the Data Input and Output LEb xl qe 123 e Configuri
90. QOc siaaa 155 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA lt CodeClass gt lt NoActChan gt lt PilotLength gt This command defines the values of the selected channel table The Channel DPCCH may only be defined once If channel DPCCH is missing in the command data it is automatically added at the end of the table Prior to this command the name of the channel table has to be defined with the command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME on page 151 Setting parameters lt CodeClass gt Code class of channel 1 I mapped Range 2 to 9 lt NoActChan gt Number of active channels Range 1to7 lt PilotLength gt pilot length of channel DPCCH Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Return values lt CodeClass gt Code class of channel 1 I mapped Range 2 to 9 lt NoActChan gt Number of active channels Range 1to7 lt PilotLength gt pilot length of channel DPCCH lt CDP1 gt Measured relative code domain power values of channel 1 lt CDP2 gt Measured relative code domain power values of channel 2 lt CDP3 gt Measured relative code domain power values of channel 3 lt CDP4 gt Measured relative code domain power values of channel 4 lt CDP5 gt Measured relative code domain power values of channel 5 lt CDP6 gt Measured relative code domain power values of channel 6 Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB DATA 8 0 0 5 1 0 00 4 1 1 0 1 0 00 4 1 0 0 1 0 00 The
91. R amp SSVSE K72 3GPP FDD Measurements Application User Manual TL 1176 8968 02 01 Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the R amp S9VSE base software 1320 7500 02 version 1 10 and higher The following firmware options are described e R amp S VSE K72 1320 7580 02 This software makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledge ment on the software CD ROM Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9VSE is abbreviated as R amp S VSE R amp S VSE K72 is abbreviated as R amp S VSE K72 R amp S VSE K72 Contents 1 ooo scissile 5 141 Aboutthis Manual ccc caves casteatit essen nnne nne Exe me eon nu daraka DIRE RR RR ERR RR NR ARRA RERO 5 1 2 Typographical Conventions eeeseseeeeeeeseeeeeeenen enne nnn nnne nnne nnn nine nnns 6
92. RIGger pornt PULSe1MMediate 4 uoo ener raa tlaoreet ter o kenn eiue 138 OUTPut TRIGger port s PULS T ENGL 7 12222 21 oorinit E Rant occu R sad a ue Fra nua vaio 138 E OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Suffix port Parameters Direction INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 56 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel Level This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut TEIGgereport 0TYPe Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 56 See Level on page 57 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 10 6 5 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S VSE has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is
93. SO Un CG iii 1 1 0 rin arr ere ra ort EE a soma tira pede Ra ov u S RR apr psa RR Eaa 125 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the instrument in use on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 56 Frontend Configuration The following commands configure frequency amplitude and y axis scaling settings which represent the frontend of the measurement setup LEM orem 125 e AMPIU SOUNGE xr eere pte esee ERR Lue Re Idus g Ee neta 127 e Configuring the Attenuation sssssssssssssseseeeeeennene enne 130 Frequency SENSe FREQuencyr GENTE 5s eec eee rese ere egt get hayek in caa ER ed Ps Ra na Eo APER cu ApRRuUO 125 SENSG FREQUBNCy GENTBIESTEP aqui eed tete e oreet tege tet nd 126 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO ccccssscscsssssscsseececsesececsssececseeesasseeesatsteseanenes 126 SENSe FREQU amp enGyr OF ES CU oie iicet eraem Re nee E nane d ra ind NEA TREGA 127 SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOW
94. Slot 0 Fig 3 15 Result Summary display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUMmary See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower BTS RI Symbol Constellation The Symbol Constellation evaluation shows all modulated signals nel and the selected slot QPSK constellation points are located o and y axis of the constellation diagram BPSK constellation point x axis ESult on page 174 of the selected chan n the diagonals not x s are always on the User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 27 R amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display 3G FDD BTS 3 Symbol Constellation Fig 3 16 Symbol Constellation display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SCONst see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Symbol EVM The Symbol EVM evaluation shows the error between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal in percent for the selected channel and the selected slot A trace over all symbols of a slot is drawn The number of symbols is in the range from 12 min to 384 max It depends on the symbol rate of the channel 3G FDD BTS 4 Symbol EVM 1 Clrw Symb 0 Symb 9 Fig 3 17 Symbol EVM display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SEVM See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe lt n gt DATA
95. State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 54 Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 54 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input In some applica tions only 50 O are supported 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 O in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 54 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S VSE Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector FIQ 1 Q data file RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 54 See I Q File State on page 55 10 6 2 2 0 10 6 3 10 6 3 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 10 6 4 2 Configuring the Trig ger Output on page 136 DIAGnostic SERVICe N
96. TPC Dedicated Physical Channel in compressed mode TPC symbols are sent in the first slot of the gap 12 CPR SF 2 Dedicated Physical Channel in compressed mode using half spreading factor SF 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements 10 6 7 1 Param Channel type Description 13 CPR SF 2 Dedicated Physical Channel in compressed mode using TPC half spreading factor SF 2 TPC symbols are sent in the first slot of the gap 14 EHICH HSUPA Enhanced HARQ Hybrid Acknowledgement Indicator Channel ERGCH HSUPA Enhanced Relative Grant Channel 15 EAGCH E AGCH Enhanced Absolute Grant Channel 16 SCPICH Secondary Common Pilot Channel Table 10 3 UE channel types and their assignment to a numeric parameter value Param Channel type Description DPDCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel 1 DPCCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel 2 HS DPCCH High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel 3 E DPCCH Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel 4 E_DPDCH Enhanced Dedicated Physical Data Channel e General Channel Detectlon irr tein eee dnd 144 e Managing Channel Tables rr ee rr e rece mad ree rod 146 e Configuring Channel Tables ecce iie cerni cene eric e tn Enn trn kae dine 150 e Configuring Channel Details BTS Measurements eese 152 e Configuring Channel Details UE Measurements
97. Te Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S VSE saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S VSE saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk 10 9 2 10 9 2 1 Analysis Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 89 e e e n DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Parameters State ON OFF0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining partic
98. The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S VSE Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 10 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Par
99. Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the instrument in use triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the instrument in use is in Ready Armed for trigger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 of the instrument in use if available User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 137 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 137 Code Domain Analysis Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe LENGth on page 138 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indica
100. WCDPower MS CTABle CATalog This command reads out the names of all channel tables stored in the software The first two result values are global values for all channel tables the subsequent values are listed for each individual table Return values lt TotalSize gt Sum of file sizes of all channel table files in bytes lt FreeMem gt Available memory left on hard disk in bytes lt FileName gt File name of individual channel table file lt FileSize gt File size of individual channel table file in bytes Usage Query only Mode UE application only Manual operation See Predefined Tables on page 71 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COPY lt FileName gt This command copies one channel table onto another one The channel table to be copied is selected with command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME on page 151 The name of the channel table may contain a maximum of 8 characters Parameters lt FileName gt Name of the new channel table Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name to be copied CONF WCDP MS CTAB COPY CTAB 2 Copies channel table NEW TAB to CTAB 2 Mode UE application only Manual operation See Copying a Table on page 72 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DELete This command deletes the selected channel table The channel table to be deleted is selected with the command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME on page 151 10 6 7 3 Configuring Code Dom
101. WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows from top left to bot tom right for each active channel The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt ChannelName_1 gt lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Win dowlndex_n gt lt ChannelName_m gt lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Win dowIndex n Return values lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Configuring the Result Display Example LAY GLOB CAT Result TQ Analyzer 1 1 2 2 Analog Demod 1 1 4 4 For the I Q Analyzer channel two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right For the Analog Demodulation channel two windows are dis played named 1 at the top or left and 4 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout GLOBal IDENtify WINDow lt ChannelName gt lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the specified chan nel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the
102. Write Preset channel Select Measurement Specifics for 1 Code Domain Power Fig 5 1 Configuration Overview for CDA measurements In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to evaluation by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview The available settings and functions in the Overview vary depending on the currently selected measurement For Time Alignment Error Measurements see chapter 5 2 1 Configuration Overview on page 81 To configure settings P Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Code Domain Analysis Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the measurement channel tab to change a specific setting Preset Channel uet rer eer dade rete t ede eec e e eee teca rr ave eds 48 Select Measurement iens eoo a reset ne Rob ngu ede caer ane AE Ea a TEN 48 teo s R 48 Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 117 Select Measurement Selects a different measurement to be performed See chapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 11 Specifics for The
103. a Fo rhe Pra nua nra 205 STATUS QUEStOnablE SY NCiPT RANSHt Ofc cies catidcece cant crane air dna ee erat Y eaaet acc 205 STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only Querying the Status Registers STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bitis 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The para
104. ain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name to be deleted CONF WCDP MS CTAB DEL Mode UE application only Manual operation See Deleting a Table on page 72 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle SELect lt FileName gt This command selects a predefined channel table file for comparison during channel detection Before using this command the RECENT channel table must be switched on first with the command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle STATe on page 148 Parameters lt FileName gt RST RECENT Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB1 ON Switches the channel table on CONF WCDP CTAB MS SEL CTAB 1 Selects the predefined channel table CTAB 1 Mode UE application only Manual operation See Selecting a Table on page 72 Configuring Channel Tables Some general settings and functions are available when configuring a predefined channel table Remote commands exclusive to configuring channel tables CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABIe NAME eeesesseseeee tenen eene nennen nnne nnn nnne 150 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COMMent sess 151 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME esses enne nnne anini 151 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COMMent essent 151 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle NAME Name This command creates a new channel table file or selects an existing channe
105. al operation See All Markers Off on page 92 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See m Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 4 on page 90 See Marker State on page 91 See Marker Type on page 91 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB statistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 22 See F Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 4 on page 90 See X value on page 91 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before
106. ameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S VSE follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available e Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 111 Introduction e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted 10 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT 10 1 3 Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to
107. an be fully recognized as for example with a HS PDSCH based on modulation type the type is indicated in the table All other channels without pilot symbols are of type CHAN Remote command SENSe CDPower HSDPamode on page 118 Compressed Mode If compressed mode is switched on some slots of a channel are suppressed To keep the overall data rate the slots just before or just behind a compressed gap can be sent with half spreading factor SF 2 This mode must be enabled to detect compressed mode channels see chapter 4 2 BTS Channel Types on page 35 Remote command SENSe CDPower PCONtrol on page 120 MIMO Activates or deactivates single antenna MIMO measurement mode If activated HS PDSCH channels with exclusively QPSK or exclusively 16 QAM on both transport streams are automatically detected and demodulated The correspond ing channel types are denoted as HS MIMO QPSK and HS MIMO 16QAM respec tively Code Domain Analysis For details see MIMO channel types on page 38 Remote command SENSe CDPower MIMO on page 120 Antenna Diversity This option switches the antenna diversity mode on and off Remote command SENSe CDPower ANTenna on page 118 Antenna Number This option switches between diversity antennas 1 and 2 Depending on the selected setting the 3GPP FDD application synchronizes to the CPICH of antenna 1 or antenna 2 Remote command SENSe CDPower ANTenna on page 118
108. and Short Form on page 112 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 10 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 10 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 10 2 Common Suffixes In 3GPP FDD applications the following common suffixes are used in remote com mands Suffix Value range Description n 1 X W
109. anesadcinesnnhiataactaticadvannandsinndeananblenasainns 79 L Lower Level Hyeteresis iecit atero pent nrbi 80 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto AII Activates all automatic adjustment functions for the current measurement settings This includes Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 59 e Autosearch for Scrambling Code on page 51 Auto Scale All on page 79 Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 156 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level The instrument in use automatically determines the optimal reference level for the cur rent input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized This function is not available on all supported instruments Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 158 Autosearch for Scrambling Code Starts a search on the measured signal for all scrambling codes The scrambling code that leads to the highest signal power is chosen as the new scrambling code Searching requires that the correct center frequency and level are set The scrambling code search can automatically determine the primary scrambling code number The secondary scrambling code number is expected as 0 Alternative scrambling codes can not be detected Therefore the range for detection is 0x0000 Ox1
110. annel slot as opposed to the Code Domain Power evaluation However for reference purposes the grid in the Power vs Slot dia gram indicates the CPICH slots The first CPICH slot is always slot 0 the grid and labels of the grid lines do not change Thus the channel slots may be shifted in the diagram grid The channel slot numbers are indicated within the power bars The selected slot is highlighted in the diagram Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PSLot see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe lt n gt DATA TPVSlot Power vs Symbol The Power vs Symbol evaluation shows the power over the symbol number for the selected channel and the selected slot The power is not averaged here The trace is drawn using a histogram line algorithm i e only vertical and horizontal lines no diago nal linear Interpolation polygon interpolation Surfaces are NOT filled User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 26 R amp SSVSE K72 Measurements and Result Display 3G FDD BTS 1 Power vs Symbol idrmw rm mw Symb 0 Symb 9 Fig 3 14 Power vs Symbol display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PSYMbol see LAYout ADD WINDow TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Result Summary on page 168 The Result Summary evaluation displays a list of measurement results on the screen For details see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 12 3GFDD BTS 2 Result Summary General Results Frame 0 CPICH
111. annels The EVM is related to the square root of the mean power of reference signal and given in percent EVM 0100 N 2560 kel0 N 1 where EVM vector error of the chip EVM of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal SSS E E User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 20 R amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slot n index number for mean power calculation of reference signal 3G FDD BTS 1 EVM vs Chip Chip 0 256 Chip Chip 2559 Fig 3 7 EVM vs Chip display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH EVMChip see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Frequency Error vs Slot For each value to be displayed the difference between the frequency error of the cor responding slot to the frequency error of the first zero slot is calculated based on CPICH slots This helps eliminate a static frequency offset of the whole signal to ach ieve a better display of the actual time dependant frequency diagram 3G FDD BTS 3 Frequency Error vs Slot lCrw Slot 14 Fig 3 8 Frequency Error vs Slot display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH FESLot see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe lt n gt DATA ATRACE User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 21 R
112. application Zoom toolbar For a description of these functions see the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual Table 1 8 Functions in the Zoom toolbar Icon Description Normal mouse mode the cursor can be used to select and move markers in a zoomed display Zoom mode displays a dotted rectangle in the diagram that can be expanded to define the zoom area Multiple zoom mode multiple zoom areas can be defined for the same diagram A B Zoom off displays the diagram in its original size p m Table 1 9 Functions in the Marker toolbar Icon Description d Place new marker Select marker MI r Reference of Toolbar Functions Description Marker type normal Marker type delta Global peak Absolute peak Currently only for GSM application Next peak to the left Next peak to the right Next peak up for spectrograms only search in more recent frames Next peak down for spectrograms only search in previous frames Global minimum Next minimum left Next minimum right Next min up for spectrograms only search in more recent frames Next min down for spectrograms only search in previous frames Set marker value to center frequency Set reference level to marker value All markers off Marker search configuration Marker configuration Table 1 10 Functions in the A
113. armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Output Type on page 57 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 57 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth lt Length gt This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent Parameters lt Length gt Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 57 Signal Capturing The following commands are required to configure how much and how data is captured from the input signal Useful commands for configuring data acquisition described elsewhere SENSe CDPower FRAMe VALue on page 158 Remote commands exclusive to signal capturing ISENSeJODPOWEEBASE aeterna esu E RR AER eae RE REP Re EAEEREN 139 SENSe CDPower FILTer S TATe cessisse eene h nh nete nnns 139 ISENSeJCDPowellOLenglfi toti poner eee ert hne reet ren eder ieee aed 139 Iis Bae del ium m 140 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements PENSEC DPOWEr SBANN Gaisa nena mee tonta ru eek crop Pet rb eadein 1
114. ates The data rate depends on the used modulation type and the spreading factor of the chan nel Spreading factors Spreading factors determine whether the transmitted data is sent in short or long sequences The spreading factor is re assigned dynamically in certain time intervals according to the current demand of users and data to be transmitted The higher the spreading factor the lower the data rate the lower the spreading factor the higher the data rate The smallest available spreading factor is 4 the largest is 512 So we can say that the code domain consists of 512 basic codes A channel with a lower spreading factor con sists of several combined codes That means a channel can be described by its num ber and its spreading factor The following table shows the relationship between the code class the spreading fac tor the number of codes per channel and the symbol rate R amp SSVSE K72 Measurement Basics Table 4 1 Relationship between code class spreading factor codes per channel and symbol rate for 3GPP FDD signals Code class Spreading factor No codes chan Symbol rate nel 2 4 128 960 ksps 3 8 64 480 ksps 4 16 32 240 ksps 5 32 16 120 ksps 6 64 8 60 ksps T 128 4 30 ksps 8 256 2 15 ksps 9 512 1 7 5 ksps In the measurement settings and results the spreading factor is often represented by the corresponding symbol rate in kilo symbols per second ksps The
115. ault is 0000 TRAC DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the trace data of the code domain power measurement Result 1 000000000 8 000000000 7 700000000E 001 2 991873932E 001 2 861357307E 001 0 000000000 8 000000000 7 800000000E 001 2 892916107E 001 2 762399483E 001 1 000000000 8 000000000 7 800000000E 001 2 856664085E 001 2 726147461E 001 if Exe Table 10 11 Trace results for Relative Code Domain Power measurement correct scrambling code Code class Channel no Abs power level Rel power level Timing offset dBm chips 8 000000000 0 000000000 4 319848537 3 011176586 0 000000000 2 000000000 1 000000000 4 318360806 3 009688854 1 000000000 8 000000000 0 000000000 7 348078156E 7 217211151E 1 000000000 001 001 Table 10 12 Trace results for Relative Code Domain Power measurement incorrect scrambling code Code class Channel no Abs power level Rel power level Timing offset dBm chips 1 000000000 8 000000000 7 700000000E 2 991873932E 2 861357307E 001 001 001 0 000000000 8 000000000 7 800000000E 2 892916107E 2 762399483E 001 001 001 1 000000000 8 000000000 7 800000000E 2 856664085E 2 726147461E 001 001 001 Programming Examples R amp S VSE K72 10 12 2 Measurement 2 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power RST Reset the instrument INST CRE REPL IQ Analyzer BWCD BTSMeasure
116. breviations or assignments to a numeric value are used as described in table 10 2 Specific commands e Retrieving Calculated Measurement Results eese 174 e Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE xn sss 178 e Relieving Trace ReSUIIS eorr teret erit men p RR E ERE RE 184 10 8 4 Retrieving Calculated Measurement Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the calculated results from the CDA and Time Alignment Error measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion TAERror RESUIt eese nenne 174 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion WCDPower BTS RESUIt eeseeeesesusss 174 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion WCDPower MS RESUIt eene 176 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion TAERror RESult lt ResultType gt This command queries the result of a time alignment measurement see chapter 3 2 Time Alignment Error Measurements on page 30 Query parameters lt ResultType gt TAERror Returns the time offset between the two antenna signals in chips Example CALC MARK FUNC TAER RES TAER Usage Query only Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Result List on page 30 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower BTS RESult lt Measurement gt This command queries the measured and calculated results of the 3GPP FDD BTS code domain power meas
117. c Comment 3GPP Base Station Test Model 1 16 Channels Delete Channel Measure Table pis Conflict Sort Table 15 icm 30 8 30 8 30 8 30 8 30 8 DPCH 30 38 On 28672 8 DPCH 30 47 Off 15104 8 DPCH 30 55 ott 5888 8 DPCH 30 62 Off 256 8 DPCH 30 69 ott 22528 8 DPCH 30 78 oft 7680 8 DPCH 30 85 Off 4608 8 DPCH 30 94 Off 7680 8 DPCH 30 102 Off 156806 8 DPCH 30 113 Off 32768 8 SS 2005 T m Channel Type rrt ot rer ade eer aca E ep Ea aSa 74 crus Hsc a c 75 Gliarinel Number Gi SE da cette etc eene edt teet lee te rte eene dede 75 WSS TCM e TT7T MT 75 Timing OMS c ER 75 PPIIOE BIS aeniea a bc uec Ceca bw ee an a aT Uic ne Oe YT suu fre Vb edu ger R ade 75 GDP REI C 75 CUM 76 oc ME S 76 Channel Type Type of channel For a list of possible channel types see chapter 4 2 BTS Channel Types on page 35 Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 152 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 153 Code Domain Analysis Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted Channel Number Ch SF Number of channel spreading code 0 to spreading factor 1 Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 152 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 153 Use TFCI Indicate
118. cations currently available in your R amp S VSE Understanding the Display Information 2 Select the 3GPP FDD BTS or 3GPP FDD UE item i953G LA j 3G FDD BTS IG E 3G FDD UE The R amp S VSE opens a new measurement channel for the 3GPP FDD application 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during a 3GPP FDD BTS mea surement All different information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections The basic screen elements are identical for 3GPP FDD UE measurements R amp S VSE K72 Welcome to the 3GPP FDD Applications 3G FDD BTS 1 Ref Level 0 00 dem Freq 1 0 GHz Channel 0256 Power Rel to CPICH Att 10 dB 2 CPICH Slot 0 Capture Frame 3GFDD BTS 1 Code Domain Power 3 1Cirw M 3G FDD BTS 3 Code Domain Error Power 3G FDD BTS 2 Result Summary General Results Frame 0 CPICH Slot 0 Pc r Inact Chan f Channels Channel Results Ch 0 256 PK 0 14 rms 1 Color coding for windows of same channel 2 Channel bar with measurement settings 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on result display Channel bar information In 3GPP FDD applications when performing Code Domain Analysis the R amp S VSE screen display shows the following settings Table 2 1 Hardware settings disp
119. ch is used for all evaluations However you can select a dif ferent branch for individual windows These settings are only available in the detailed dialog box which is displayed when you select the Details button in the Evaluation Range dialog box Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS Measurements Channel Ch SF 0 256 Slot 0 Frame 0 Branch ar Select Branch for Window Use Common Branch No Specifics for 1 Code Domain Power To hide the detailed dialog box for individual windows select the Hide button Selecting a Different Branch for a Window Branch UE measurements only By default the same common branch is used by all windows namely the one speci fied by the Branch UE measurements only setting In order to evaluate a different branch for an individual window toggle the Use Com mon Branch setting to No Select the window from the list of active windows under Specifics for then select the Branch Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CDPower Mapping on page 159 6 2 Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS Measurements Some evaluations provide further settings for the results The settings for BTS mea surements are described here Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Common 4 Compensate IQ Offset On Off Code Domain Power Code Power Display Absolute ee j Power Reference Total Sho
120. channel HSPDSCH NONE slot without power of an HS PDSCH channel HS SCCH HSDPA High Speed Shared Control Channel The High Speed Shared Control Channel HSDPA does not contain any pilot sym bols It is a channel type that is expected in code classes equal to or higher than 7 The modulation type should always be QPSK The channel does not contain any pilot symbols If the application is configured to recognize all QPSK modulated channels without pilot symbols see HSDPA UPA on page 49 the channels of HSDPA will be found among the data channels If the type of a channel can be fully recognized as for example with a DPCH based on pilot sequences or HS PDSCH based on modulation type the type is entered in the field TYPE All other channels without pilot symbols are of type CHAN The channels are in descending order according to symbol rates and within a symbol rate in ascending order according to the channel numbers There fore the unassigned codes are always to be found at the end of the table If the modulation type for a channel can vary the measured value of the modulation type will be appended to the type of the channel SSS gt SS a a User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 37 R amp SSVSE K72 Measurement Basics Channel type Description EHICH ERGCH HSUPA Enhanced HARQ Hybrid Acknowledgement Indicator Channel Enhanced Relative Grant Channel EAGCH Enhanced Absolute Grant Channel SCPICH Se
121. channel configurations is shown in the following Basic parameters of CDP analysis are changed to demonstrate the effects of values that are not adapted to the input signal Test setup 1 Connect the RF A output of the R amp S SMW200A to the RF input of the R amp S FSW coaxial cable with N connectors 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference output REF OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S SMW200A coaxial cable with BNC connectors Measurement 1 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power Settings on the R amp S SMW200A 1 PRESET Freq A 2 1175 GHz Level 0 dBm Baseband A gt CDMA Standards gt 3GPP FDD General tab Link Direction gt DOWN FORWARD Basestations tab Test Setups Models gt Test Model 1 16 channels Basestations tab Select Basestation BS 1 ON General tab 3GPP FDD gt STATE gt ON o 0o doo Ro Nw RF A On Settings in the R amp S VSE File gt Preset gt All 2 Measurement Group Setup Replace Channel gt 3GPP FDD BTS 3 Input and Output gt Amplitude Reference level 10 dBm 4 Input and Output gt Frequency Center frequency 2 1175 GHz 5 Input and Output gt Scale Auto Scale Once Result Window 1 shows the Code Domain Power of the signal Window 2 shows the Result Summary i e the numeric results of the CDP measure ment R amp S VSE K72 Measurement Examples 3
122. chronization scc ced E e RR Ld EE d ETE Ld AL A 141 e Channel Detecoli ioi eruere teas One ERR E eee ues acre 143 e Automatic Settings eren rper ett tenue tan fete ER tease EXER Ee ae E pan e nunnana nnana 155 e Evaluation Range eei iebeee Ionia FEET SERE ER ERE ERE ERA THAT AETERNE 158 e Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS Measurements sssss 160 e Code Domain Analysis Settings UE Measurements ssssessssss 162 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal e BIS Signal DeSscriptiohi crece ee eter tec ii rv 118 e BIS sScraiblimngQCouUb nna o Here rte x a eu eee ne 121 e UE Signal Descrlpltioh iicet tr reno kenn tna pa e nter EE tene ed ERE nete ce ue ERE 122 10 6 1 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements BTS Signal Description The following commands describe the input signal in BTS measurements SENSe CDPOoWerAN Tenfia uc iuueni intenta nta rnnr p nk oh pEx nar ap Rq emet eR nee eu EREA duh 118 SENSeTCDPowWwerHSDPalliodg nere reet ee totam ae nete trend e cea deu aS 118 SENSe CDPower L CODe SEARch IMMediate esses 119 SENSe OCDPower LCODe SEAReHLEIST etienne ne Ran ean x ERR E ORTA 119 ISENSe JODP OWET MIMO ciesa a tose eere netu deni luteo tanec aaa ea ee ene euet e hne E e ad 120 SENSe 3CDPower PCONIEOl 22 i ropret eae a
123. codes BTS Scrambling codes UE es PRAM CS Mo S Capture mde ont tret rer er a Evaluation range a Nurmber to captute ceret ttn Selected eee beet ee pee reds Free Run EI 64 Frequency Config ratiOni creta hr Er terree i ete Configuration remote M OffSeL ccs i o e eO etus Frequency Error vs Slot Evaluation mereni tate Gere dee reae eleva 21 Trace result sranie rnnt 183 Frontend ConfiguratiOrii ciet reor rere 57 Configuration remote sees 125 Full slot Evaluation 2 253 t eH uerb Ud tt 87 H Half slot Evaluation zo EH dires ede ES 87 Hardware settings CDA Displayed 5 rto teens 9 High pass filter PROMO at es dst n i eds 123 amino 54 HS3DPA UBA ctii tete eet eee sept 49 52 HS PDSCH HS SSQLbl zat vit eec a D Dura Hysteresis Lower A to level op ade ee 80 Upper Auto level i i tete rtr 79 l VQ imbalan CE nean a tite tds 12 EROI EE AE 12 1 Q Power Trigger level remote esee 134 IF Power Trigger level remote eeeseeeeeee 134 Impedance ine 124 SOING uci cncerectocen iaces Cote tonsa teint s Conse n abus seh 54 Inactive Channel Threshold eeseeessess 70 Input COUPLING aironi rector re iria reni Us von tbt onc ds Coupling remote is fuer EE Input sources INSTRUIMONE acoso retis ie ies sc re ipee tennis 54
124. condary Common Pilot Channel CHAN If the application is configured to recognize all QPSK modulated channels without pilot symbols see HSDPA UPA on page 49 all QPSK modulated channels without pilot symbols and a code class higher than or equal to 7 are marked with the channel type CHAN MIMO channel types Optionally single antenna MIMO measurement channels can also be detected In this case HS PDSCH channels with exclusively QPSK or exclusively 16 QAM on both transport streams are automatically detected and demodulated The corresponding channel types are denoted as HS MIMO QPSK and HS MIMO 16QAM The MIMO constellations resulting on a single antenna consist of three amplitudes per dimension 1 0 1 in the case of QPSK x QPSK and seven amplitudes per dimen sion 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 in the case of 16 QAM x 16 QAM The symbol decisions of these constellations can be retrieved via the bitstream output The mapping between bits and constellation points is given by the following table Table 4 4 Mapping between bits and constellation points for MIMO QPSK Constellation point normalized Bit sequence 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 BiA For MIMO 16QAM the bit sequence is the same in both and Q Only one dimension is given here Table 4 5 Mapping between bits and constellation points for MIMO 1
125. crambling code search can automatically determine the primary scrambling code number The secondary scrambling code number is expected as 0 Alternative scrambling codes can not be detected Therefore the range for detection is 0x0000 Ox1FFOh where the last digit is always O Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch IMMediate on page 119 Export Writes the detected scrambling codes together with their powers into a text file in the R amp S user directory C R_S Instr User ScrCodes txt 5 1 2 3 UE Signal Description UE Measurements The settings available to describe the input signal in UE measurements are described here Code Domain Analysis Scrambling Scrambling Code Hex l Dec Long Short J m QPSK Modulation Only On or Scrambling Code Defines the scrambling code used to transmit the signal in the specified format The scrambling code identifies the user equipment transmitting the signal If an incor rect scrambling code is defined a CDP measurement of the signal is not possible Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe VALue on page 121 Format Switches the display format of the scrambling codes between hexadecimal and deci mal Remote command SENS CDP LCOD DVAL numeric value see SENSe CDPower LCODe DVALue on page 121 Type Defines whether the entered scrambling code is to be handled as a long or short scrambling code Remote command SENSe CDPower
126. ct the New Copy or Edit buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box 898988838888 EOS save Tabie Table Channel EM 77 SVIMBO RU io irte euo ded ee ce eee dem ete te ee de eec dere Gi de ge bec viene 77 Channel Number Chis SE icai cedere ote Eder er prier eese cen ro eii ergo 77 BD tei rex roue penn terre mercer crercer etic rrceer re ud UP RUE I erect 77 cd M TT BEI TT ICI f H TT Code Domain Analysis Channel Type Type of channel For a list of possible channel types see chapter 4 2 BTS Channel Types on page 35 Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 152 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 153 Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted Channel Number Ch SF Number of channel spreading code 0 to spreading factor 1 Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 152 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 153 Mapping Branch onto which the channel is mapped I or Q The setting is not editable since the standard specifies the channel assignment for each channel Pilot Bits Number of pilot bits of the channel only valid for the control channel DPCC
127. ctive measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 for a list of availa ble window types Note that the window type must be valid for the active measure ment channel To create a window for a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal REPLace WINDow com mand Example LAY WIND2 REPL MTAB Replaces the result display in window 2 with a marker table 10 7 3 General Window Commands The following commands are required to work with windows independently of the application Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel DISPlayEWINDOowWwsns S ELeol er ttr e teet vete ecce tex deed rnt eaa dere oer tnos 173 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SELect This command sets the focus on the selected result display window This window is then the active window Example DISP WIND1 SEL Sets the window 1 active Usage Setting only Retrieving Results 10 8 Retrieving Results The following commands are required to retrieve the results from a 3GPP FDD mea surement in a remote environment When the channel type is required as a parameter by a remote command or provided as a result for a remote query ab
128. d Channel Tables list Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 150 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME on page 151 Comment Optional description of the channel table Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COMMent on page 151 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COMMent on page 151 Adding a Channel Inserts a new row in the channel table to define another channel Deleting a Channel Deletes the currently selected channel from the table Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table Creates a completely new channel table according to the current measurement data Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASurement on page 116 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement on page 116 Sorting the Table Sorts the channel table entries Cancelling Configuration Closes the Channel Table dialog box without saving the changes 5 1 8 4 Code Domain Analysis Saving the Table Saves the changes to the table and closes the Channel Table dialog box Channel Details BTS Measurements Channel details are configured in the Channel Table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Copy or Edit buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box Channel Table Setting Name 3GB 1 16 U
129. d Tables on page 71 Table 10 4 Description of query results in example Value Description 52853 Total size of all channel table files 52583 bytes 2634403840 Free memory on hard disk 2 6 Gbytes 3GB 1 16 XML Channel table 1 3GB 16 XM Li 3469 File size for channel table 1 3469 bytes 3GB 1 32 XML Channel table 2 3GB _32 XM Li 5853 File size for channel table 2 5853 bytes 3GB 1 64 XML Channel table 3 3GB 64 XM Li 10712 File size for channel table 3 10712 bytes Channel table x CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COPY lt FileName gt This command copies one channel table onto another one The channel table to be copied is selected with command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 150 The name of the channel table may contain a maximum of 8 characters Parameters lt FileName gt name of the new channel table Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Example CONF WCDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name to be copied CONF WCDP CTAB COPY CTAB 2 Copies channel table NEW TAB to CTAB 2 Usage Event Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Copying a Table on page 72 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DELete This command deletes the selected channel table The channel table to be deleted is selected with the command
130. d to another carrier Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CONF WCDP ASC STAT ON Mode BTS application only CONFigure WCDPower BTS MCARrier STATe State Activate this command if multiple carriers are used In this case the adjust reference level procedure ensures that the settings of RF attenuation and reference level are optimally adjusted for measuring a multicarrier signal Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF WCDP MCAR STAT ON Mode BTS application only SENSe JADJust ALL This command initiates a measurement to determine and set the ideal settings for the current task automatically only once for the current measurement This includes Reference level e Scrambling code e Scaling Example ADJ ALL Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All on page 78 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S VSE performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters Duration Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of
131. damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 130 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 131 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the instrument in use you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately Note Note that restrictions may apply concerning which frequencies electronic attenu ation is available for depending on which instrument is connected to the R amp S VSE software Check your instrument documentation for details User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 59 Code Domain Analysis In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 132 INPut EATT AUTO on page
132. defined CPICH see SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna STATe on page 142 Note this command is equivalent to the command SENSe CDPower UCPich PATTern on page 208 for antenna 1 Suffix antenna 1 2 Antenna to be configured Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters Pattern 112 1 fixed usage of Pattern 1 according to standard 2 fixed usage of Pattern 2 according to standard RST 2 Example SENS CDP UCP ANT2 PATT 1 Mode BTS application only Manual operation See S CPICH Antenna Pattern on page 69 SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT lt antenna gt STATe State Defines whether the common pilot channel CPICH is defined by a user defined posi tion instead of its default position Note this command is equivalent to the command SENSe CDPower UCPich STATe on page 208 for antenna 1 Suffix lt antenna gt 112 Antenna to be configured Parameters State 0 Standard configuration CPICH is always on channel 0 1 User defined configuration position defined using SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna CODE on page 141 RST 0 Example SENS CDP CPIC ANT2 STAT 1 Mode BTS application only Manual operation See CPICH Mode on page 69 SENSe CDPower STYPe Type This command selects the type of synchronization Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters Type CPICh SCHann
133. des all the information specific to the application All general software functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included e Welcome to the R amp S VSE 3GPP FDD Measurements application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application e Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types Measurement Basics Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement Configuration Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command How to Perform Measurements in the R amp S VSE 3GPP FDD Measurements application The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods Measurement Examples Detailed measurement examples to guide you through typical measurement sce narios and allow you to try out the application immediately Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the measurement configura tion e Remote Commands for 3GPP FDD Measurements Remote commands required to configure and perform 3GPP FDD measureme
134. digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the instrument in use is adapted according to this value it is rec ommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 129 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level The scal ing of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S VSE so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps R amp S VSE K72 Configuration Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S VSE must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 129 Unit Reference Level For C
135. displayed slot num ber The channel search only considers standard channels Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Compressed Mode on page 49 BTS Scrambling Code The scrambling code identifies the base station transmitting the signal in BTS mea surements SENSeJODPOwerECODe DVADLU 2 1 tnr R a trea eruere toe pe dude ta e XR etn ERR DE RRR 121 SENSe GDPower ECOBep VALUg eceziericic rennen potnit nhanh Pha iR nne dokn e Raga 121 SENSe CDPower LCODe DVALue lt ScramblingCode gt This command defines the scrambling code in decimal format Parameters ScramblingCode lt numeric value RST 0 Example SENS CDP LCOD DVAL 3 Defines the scrambling code in decimal format Manual operation See Scrambling Code on page 51 See Format Hex Dec on page 51 See Format on page 52 SENSe CDPower L CODe VALue lt ScramblingCode gt This command defines the scrambling code in hexadecimal format Parameters lt ScramblingCode gt Range HO to H1fff RST HO Example SENS CDP LCOD H2 Defines the scrambling code in hexadecimal format Manual operation See Format Hex Dec on page 51 See Scrambling Code on page 52 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements 10 6 1 3 UE Signal Description The following commands describe the input signal in UE measurements Useful commands for describing UE signals described elsewhere SENSe CD
136. ds described there only allow you to configure the layout within the active measurement channel LAYout GEOBabADD WINDOWJD 5 121222 rri iron titre tert tote pea E ae RET RETEN 163 LAYout GEOBaECATalogE WINDow 2 32 22 2 3th rtr uie eeu ote tarn Rondo en ie Ie EEA 165 LAYout GLOBal IDENtify WINDOw cesses eene nnne iaia nnn nennt 166 LAYout GLOBaEREMoVve WINDOW 0 torneo ote oro h eta ected dee eL niodo RE 166 LAYout GLOBal REPEacepWIBNDONW ctc oca dote beer pe tenete enano train ions 167 LAYout GLOBal ADD WINDow lt ExChanName gt lt ExWinName gt lt Direction gt lt NewChanName gt lt NewWinT ype gt This command adds a window to the display next to an existing window The new win dow may belong to a different channel than the existing window Configuring the Result Display To replace an existing window use the LAYout GLOBal REPLace WINDow com mand Parameters lt ExChanName gt lt ExWinName gt lt Direction gt lt NewChanName gt lt NewWinType gt Return values lt NewWindowName gt Example Usage string Name of an existing channel string Name of the existing window within the lt ExChanName gt chan nel the new window is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout GLOBal IDENtify WINDow query LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow T
137. e Prior to this command the name of the channel table has to be defined with command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME on page 151 The values of the table are defined with command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 153 Parameters Comment Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name CONF WCDP MS CTAB COMM Comment for table 1 Defines a comment for the table Mode UE application only Manual operation See Comment on page 73 10 6 7 4 Configuring Channel Details BTS Measurements The following commands are used to configure individual channels in a predefined channel table in BTS measurements CONFIgure WOCDPaowerLBTSECTABIG DATA Laeti tdt ttr onte eene 152 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt UseTFCI gt lt TimingOffset gt PilotLength lt ChannelType gt Status lt CDP gt This command defines or queries the values of the selected channel table Each line of the table consists of 8 values Channels PICH CPICH and PCCPCH may only be defined once If channel CPICH or PCCPCH is missing in the command it is automatically added at the end of the table Prior to this command the name of the channel table has to be defined with the com mand CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 150 Parameters lt CodeClass gt
138. e ip opm E Channel detection Perro m Configuring uuo ML esa E Predetineditables oe cereo trt tree bere een 35 Remote control Search MOG Cbs c ccc excite e error EEE EEE de M Channel number Clhiannel POWER eeces cocco xt ern OE Channel table Oro n To E yz o RP ERE RTT TOT 16 Channel tables COMPASSO couette S 35 71 Configuring Configuring remote ssssen 150 Configuring channels remote 152 153 Copying irum 72 Creating TOI IUE seco epe riore tet eene sa ter nete 73 Deleting Detalls BTS CDD EE 74 petals UE E 76 Editing EV AWA ON secs Rn Managing aessa eaea Managing remote Predefined eer seca cunestrensaten estate sxstvusycavanntencey EEE FRESLOMING e Selecting i upprd oan Sorting Trace results Channel types BIS indes terre rete trey tae pe entree earner oy pres Ond Compressed Configuring in table ul om coat Parameter values remote PCCPCH PIGH s PSCH SCCPCH ciel ME Special 21x21 2 220 pep Te Ede 34 SSCH is 36 Synchronization 4599 UE seeds 299 Channels 2522 ei test ir ere tede bue 32 AGUVOG scere reip dott tu Wt ER ERE hanes 70 76 77 Bandwidth Rn ate i 32 Displayed
139. e EVM sess 212 e Measurement 4 Determining the Peak Code Domain Error 213 10 12 14 Measurement 1 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power RST Reset the instrument INST CRE REPL IQ Analyzer BWCD BTSMeasurement Replace the default channel by a 3GPP FDD BTS channel named BTSMeasurement DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 10 Set the reference level to 10 dBm FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz Set the center Frequency to 2 1175 GHz DISP TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the current measurement INIT CONT OFF Stops continuous sweep SWE COUN 100 Set the number of sweeps to be performed to 100 INIT WAI Start a new measurement with 100 sweeps and wait for the end CALC MARK FUNC WCDP BTS RES CDPR Retrieve the relative code domain power Result 0 dB TRAC DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the trace data of the code domain power measurement Result 8 000000000 40 000000000 4 319848537 3 011176586 40 000000000 2 000000000 41 000000000 4 318360806 3 009688854 4 1 000000000 Programming Examples R amp S VSE K72 8 000000000 0 000000000 7 348078156E 001 7 217211151E 001 1 000000000 ae sss Select the external Frequency from the REF INPUT 1 20 MHZ connector as a reference DEV EXTR SOUR MyFSW E10 Query the carrier Frequency error Result 0 1 Hz CDP LCOD DVAL 0001 Change the scrambling code on the analyzer to 0001 def
140. e and index of all active windows in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 for a list of availa ble window types Note that the window type must be valid for the active measure ment channel To create a window for a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal REPLace WINDow com mand Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout WINDow n ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command Configuring the Result Display This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 for a list of availa ble window types Note that the window type must be valid for the active measure ment channel To create a window for a different measurement channel use the LAYout
141. e ander agrees SENSe CDPower PDISpl y 1 inttr rh tre treten trece n Ea EXE FLY py HR e ER FE Pre Hi Lh SENSe CDPower PREFerence SENSe CDPower PRESU a tioea reo o acted adiu o c end ce end deste pta na N SENSe CDPowef QIINVert coc sh terrere trae rather ner nere KERNEL PR CER C n FE RE Re EUR EXER ERAS SENSe CDPowet QBPSK iet rn teet red Peer e ra Poker ne bt snaseudundiaedeustonues vested sheveurth aby sheseeamieteieneet SENSE CDPOWE r SBANA irina a aietun ane atendnee aman oeeatl an mcmaeeds SENSe CDPower SEAGIOrL irt ccs icm rre e pe n t pe Ra Eve FEX Reo RE SEE ELS EPICA NAATA EE az E eee REX EE ed SENSE CDPOWer SLOT Re edna atiaed SENSe CDPower SD YD eit inerte ct Reps cient unc err D REUS rbd eed antes redlaes sue Toavediar eaters cent SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna CODE sessesssssseeeseeneenee nnne nnneeener en ren EDADE innere 141 SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna PATTern esses nennen nennen nennen nennen 141 SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna S TA Te en epo auth ta hack n crane a 142 SENSe CDPower UCPich CODE SENSe CDPower UCPich PATTern SENSe CDPower UCPich STATe tttttttttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ond 208 SENSe FREQuency CENTED sscssssssssssssssssssessssssessssssecsessssessssusesssssuvessssusessssisessssuiessssnutesssiueessssuesssssneesen 125 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP ssssssssssssssssssssessssssesssssseessssusessssssess
142. e command INPut IMPedance on page 124 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function may require an additional hardware option on the instrument in use Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 123 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector if available on the instrument in use An internal YIG preselector at the input of the instrument in use ensures that image fre quencies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the instrument in use which may lead to image frequency display Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 124 0 5 1 3 2 Code Domain Analysis I Q File Input Alternatively to live data input from a connected instrument measurement data to be analyzed by the R amp S VSE software can also be provided offline by a stored data file This allows you to perform a measurement on any instrument store the results to a file and analyze the stored data partially or as a whole at any time using the R amp S VSE software The Input Source settings defined in the Input dialog box are identical to those con figured for a specific chann
143. e level offset is also considered Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe lt Type gt Parameters lt Type gt POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 65 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source Note that the availability of trigger sources depends on the instrument in use Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters Source IMMediate Free Run EXT EXT2 EXT3 EXT4 Trigger signal from the corresponding TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the instrument in use or the oscillo Scope s corresponding input channel For details on the connectors see the instrument s Ge
144. e reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 59 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S VSE determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 59 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 131 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters l
145. easurement Group Setup Displays the Measurement Group Setup window to configure a measurement sequence New Window gt e Inserts a new result display window for the selected measure ment channel Channel Infos gt Displays the channel bar with global channel information for the selected meausrement channel Active Windows gt Selects a result display as the active window the corresponding channel is also activated Configure Selected Result Window Displays the Window Configuration dialog box to configure result specific settings Help Menu The Help menu provides access to help support and licensing functions Support Menu item Correspond Description ing icon in toolbar Help P Opens the Online help window License Licensing version and options information Support functions Register VSE Attempts to create an email with the default mail program if available to the Rohde amp Schwarz support address for registra tion Online Support Opens the default web browser and attempts to establish an Internet connection to the Rohde amp Schwarz product site About Software version information 3GP FDD Measurements Menus The following menus are only available if a 3GP FDD measurement channel is selected Marker Menu Input amp Output Menu Meas Setup Menu Trace MEn oinm iaa n eaan Ee a E a ii e EEE a a aara Limite MEDU
146. eeensneee 71 e Channel Table Settings and Functions ssssssssssssseeeeeeneee 72 e Channel Details BTS Measurements ssssssssssssseseeeenn enne 74 e Channel Details UE Measurements sssssssssssssssseeeenee nnns 76 5 1 8 1 General Channel Detection Settings Channel detection settings are configured in the Channel Detection dialog box which is displayed when you select the Channel Detection button in the configuration Over view Code Domain Analysis Inactive Channel Threshold 60 0 Predefined Channel Tables Use Predefined Channel Table Compare Meas Signal with Predefined Table Show Timing Offset 8 Relative to CPICH Relative to Predefined Table Predefined Tables 3GPP Base Station Test Model 1 16 Channels Select is Inactive Channel Threshold BTS measurements only sssssesse 70 Using Predefined Channel Tables 2 2 rte eric neat 70 Comparing the Measurement Signal with the Predefined Channel Table 71 Timing Offset Reference eerie rer ertt tL aem Fee itin Re e Te i UNa 71 Inactive Channel Threshold BTS measurements only Defines the minimum power that a single channel must have compared to the total sig nal in order to be recognized as an active channel Remote command SENSe CDPower ICTReshold on page 146 Using Predefined Channel Tables Defines the channel
147. eeseeeseee nennen nennen nnn nn nn nnn nn nnn nnn 46 5 2 Time Alignment Error Measurement s ecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeanes 81 SEE GC eeee 83 6 1 Evaluation Ranges RNE ENE RA O suucreteastacsesedestecesedenscuen 83 6 2 Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS Measurements eee 85 6 3 Code Domain Analysis Settings UE Measurements eese 87 6 4 TACOS asic ccccnaivaananesdcesaecncns EERRRRNRAKRMENREERURAR E RR RR E RERRREREEEKKEKR AR NRRRRRRNSR CE RC GUXN 88 COME CIEGO DTE 89 7 How to Perform Measurements in 3GPP FDD Applications 95 8 Measurement Examples eeeseeeeeeeeeeeee eee eene nennen 98 User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 3 R amp SSVSE K72 Contents 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 9 1 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 A 1 A 2 Measurement 1 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power 98 Measurement 2 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power 102 Measurement 3 Measuring the Composite EVM een 104 Measurement 4 Determining the Peak Code Domain Error 106 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 109 A E E 109 Remote Commands for 3GPP FDD Measurements 110 Introduction eoe ERIGI on
148. el CPICh Synchronization is carried out to CPICH For this type of syn chronization the CPICH must be available in the input signal SCHannel Synchronization is carried out without CPICh This type of syn chronization is required for test model 4 without CPICH RST CPICh Example SENS CDP STYP SCH Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Synchronization Type on page 68 10 6 7 Channel Detection The channel detection settings determine which channels are found in the input signal The commands for working with channel tables are described here When the channel type is required as a parameter by a remote command or provided as a result for a remote query the following abbreviations and assignments to a numeric value are used Table 10 2 BTS channel types and their assignment to a numeric parameter value Param Channel type Description 0 DPCH Dedicated Physical Channel of a standard frame 1 PICH Paging Indication Channel 2 CPICH Common Pilot Channel 3 PSCH Primary Synchronization Channel 4 SSCH Secondary Synchronization Channel 5 PCCPCH Primary Common Control Physical Channel 6 SCCPCH Secondary Common Control Physical Channel 7 HS SCCH HSDPA High Speed Shared Control Channel 8 HS PDSCH HSDPA High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel 9 CHAN Channel without any pilot symbols QPSK modulated 10 CPRSD Dedicated Physical Channel in compressed mode 11 CPR
149. el in the Measurement Group Setup window c temp IqRecording 1481 iq tar Select File J Saved by VSE 0 80a 51 Beta Comment Date amp time 2014 11 12T11 19 35 Sample rate 32 MHz Number of samples 1301 Duration of signal 40 6562 us Number of channels 1 Hes TIT RTT 55 gendi D E 55 I Q File State Activates input from the selected I Q data file Remote command INPut SELect on page 124 Input File Specifies the I Q data file to be used for input Select Select File to open the Load I Q File dialog box Output Settings The R amp S VSE can control the output provided by the instrument in use to special con nectors for other devices For details on the output connectors refer to the instrument s Getting Started manual Output settings can be configured via the Input amp Output Output menu item Which output settings and connectors are available depends on the instrument in use Code Domain Analysis IF Video Output IF Out Frequency 50 0 MHz Noise Source o eB Trigger 2 CEB output Trigger 3 input Output IE VIDEOIBEMOD OUUU ierra oi anro ardent re peteret c terna etes ce pac 56 laesus H 56 lois Po 56 IQ GCE 2h Oe PM 56 ROT o Ta EN 57 L bevel LS 57 L Pulse beng eon E 57 L Send TMOJE DNE 57 IF VIDEO DEMOD Output This function is currently not available IF Out Frequency This
150. ence to Previous Slot on page 86 SENSe CDPower PREFerence lt Mode gt This command defines the reference for the relative CDP measurement values 10 6 11 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters Mode TOTal CPICh TOTal Total signal power CPICh CPICH channel power RST TOTal Example SENS CDP PREF CPIC Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Code Power Display on page 86 Code Domain Analysis Settings UE Measurements Some evaluations provide further settings for the results The commands for UE mea surements are described here Useful commands for Code Domain Analysis described elsewhere cCALCulate MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ZOOM on page 160 SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 160 SENSe CDPower PDISplay on page 161 Remote commands exclusive to Code Domain Analysis in UE Measurements SENSe CDPowetrETGHIDS ioo cepta decanted a bere aide eua ke E eu wb be N 162 SENSe CDPoWwetHSLOt Em 163 SENSe CDPower ETCHips State This command selects length of the measurement interval for calculation of error vec tor magnitude EVM In accordance with 3GPP specification Release 5 the EVM measurement interval is one slot 4096 chips minus 25 us 3904 chips at each end of the burst if power changes are expected If no power changes are expected the evalu ation length is one slot 4096 chips Parameters State ON Changes of powe
151. er the name RECENT and is selected for use After the RECENT channel table is switched on another channel table can be selected with the command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 148 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF WCDP CTAB ON Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Using Predefined Channel Tables on page 70 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle CATalog This command reads out the names of all channel tables stored in the software The first two result values are global values for all channel tables the subsequent values are listed for each individual table Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Return values lt TotalSize gt lt FreeMem gt lt FileName gt lt FileSize gt Example Usage Mode Manual operation Sum of file sizes of all channel table files in bytes Available memory left on hard disk in bytes File name of individual channel table file File size of individual channel table file in bytes CONF WCDP CTAB CAT Sample result description see table below 52853 2634403840 3GB 1 16 XML 3469 3GB 1 32 XML 5853 3GB 1 64 XML 10712 3GB 2 3430 3GB 3 32 XML 5868 3GB 4 XML 678 3GB 5 2 4101 3GB 5 8 XML 7209 MYTABLI XML XML E XML Query only BTS application only 1428 3GB 3 16 XML 2554 3GB 5 4 XML 7202 3GB 6 XML 349 See Predefine
152. es not provide the center frequency it is assumed to be 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 125 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased using the arrow keys When you use the mouse wheel the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed value This setting is available for frequency and time domain measurements X Span Sets the step size for the center frequency to a defined factor of the span The X Factor defines the percentage of the span Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 96 Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field Code Domain Analysis Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 126 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absol
153. esas d nnd 93 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command chapter 10 9 2 3 Positioning the Marker on page 197 6 5 4 Marker Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search These functions are available as icons in the toolbar or from the Marker menu In Code Domain Analysis measurements the markers are set to individual symbols codes slots or channels depending on the result display Thus you can use the mark ers to identify individual codes for example Markers in Code Domain Analysis measurements Search Next Peak erre et o t Eee cca o ined ear d e es ead Ua D C xd 93 Seatrohi Next MINIMUMI iiit ores ra pe FERE Ex aee a cup eaae e Eod re da a a 94 Peak Soal uicina rere A E ER Ee FEA SHE GU E S Ar 94 SS AC MINOT REPETIT TOTO EE 94 Marker ToC m 94 Marker TH PCOPCH eic etu a edi detu mq totus delendam e iM D cUU Od RU Ups 94 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Y Y Ns SX Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on pa
154. et level Incorrectly set scrambling code Incorrectly set values for Q INVERT or SIDE BAND INVERT Invalid signal at input Antenna 1 synchronization is not possible Time Alignment Error measurements 3GPP FDD BTS only 2 For Time Alignment Error measurements 3GPP FDD BTS only bit is set if antenna 2 syn chronization is not possible Otherwise not used 3to4 Not used 5 Incorrect Pilot Symbol This bit is set when one or more of the received pilot symbols are not equal to the specified pilot symbols of the 3GPP standard Possible reasons e Incorrectly sent pilot symbols in the received frame Low signal to noise ratio SNR of the W CDMA signal Oneor more code channels has a significantly lower power level compared to the total power The incorrect pilots are detected in these channels because of low channel SNR e One or more channels are sent with high power ramping In slots with low relative power to total power the pilot symbols might be detected incorrectly check the signal quality by using the symbol constellation display 6to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStonablE SYNODEVENIIG acuta tar geo nter Enti Re baguette aa 204 STATUS QUEStonable SYNC IOONDITOI 1 terea rne dove ecd ret reae i necis 205 STATus QUEStionable SYNG ENABIG 2 au crt eain eaa xa antra nuu asc au curse a aqaa rcuis 205 STATUus QUEStonable S YNGO NTRATFiSIBOFPI 221222 15 innato pna an hu
155. evep WINDOW coacta ax iaceat to ote e rte AA ene doe treats 171 LAYoutREPLace WINDOW cis 2 2 eua ctetu toto etre coco denke ra a aani irana 171 LAYout WINDow n ADD sess eene memet n nnne nnn n ennt nente rrtr sn nsn essen enne 171 Configuring the Result Display EA Y oUEWINDOwWsSmscIDEINUEUT eed oeste een tle ae pere ertet cuta eei eet 172 LAYoutWINDowsm REMOVE 2 2 72 rrr easet aa cba etta a gv ee a eae n cR RE Sra w cR Yes v DR Ri SrRR di 172 LAY Our VVINDOW Shi REPLACE sce Laici aa a aa eau mex thea mec ta get ca rto ru aee Pad koe uad 173 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values No
156. ffset This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 63 Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 63 10 6 3 2 Amplitude Settings The following commands are required to configure the amplitude settings in a remote environment Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling on page 123 INPut IMPedance on page 124 SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 158 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE eseseeeeeeennenenen 127 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum eese 128 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MINimum eseeeeeeen eene 128 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDlVision eeeseseseseeeeeeene enn 128 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel essen 129 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet seeeesesssssss 129 INPURGAINIS TANG m 129 INPUEGAINDVA LUG isses err e a butt
157. fit of this evaluation is limited senseless In Composite Constellation evaluation the constellation points of the 1536 chips are displayed for the specified slot This data is determined inside the DSP even before the channel search Thus it is not possible to assign constellation points to channels The constellation points are displayed normalized with respect to the total power SSS gt ae User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 18 R amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display TE 3G FDD BTS 1 Composite Constellation 1Clw rm Fig 3 5 Composite Constellation display for 3GGPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CCONst see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Composite EVM The Composite EVM evaluation displays the root mean square composite EVM modu lation accuracy according to the 3GPP specification The square root is determined of the mean squared errors between the real and imaginary components of the received signal and an ideal reference signal EVM referenced to the total signal The error is averaged over all channels for individual slots The Composite EVM evaluation covers the entire signal during the entire observation time N n 0 2 CERE T n 2 2 n 0 where EVMems root mean square of the vector error of the composite signal S complex chip value of received signal Xn complex chip value of reference signal n i
158. following channels are defined DPCCH and two data chan nels with 960 ksps Mode UE application only Manual operation See Channel Type on page 74 See Channel Number Ch SF on page 75 See Pilot Bits on page 75 See CDP Relative on page 75 See Status on page 76 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA HSDPcch State This command activates or deactivates the HS DPCCH entry in a predefined channel table Parameters State RST ON Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB DATA HSDP ON Mode UE application only CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa lt CodeClass gt lt NoActChan gt This command defines the values for an E DPCCH channel in the selected channel table The channel table must be selected using the command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME on page 151 Setting parameters lt CodeClass gt Code class of channel Range 2 to 9 10 6 8 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements lt NoActChan gt Number of active channels Range 0 to4 Return values lt CodeClass gt Code class of channel Range 2 to 9 lt NoActChan gt Number of active channels Range 0 to4 lt ECDP1 gt Measured relative code domain power values of channel 1 lt ECDP2 gt Measured relative code domain power values of channel 2 lt ECDP3 gt Measured relative code domain power values of channel 3 lt ECDP4 gt Measured relative code domain power values of channel 4 Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB EDAT 8 3 M
159. g the Relative Code Domain Power with Incorrect Scram bling Code 8 2 Measurement 2 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power If the code domain power measurement is performed without external triggering a sec tion of approximately 20 ms of the test signal is recorded at an arbitrary moment to detect the start of a 3GPP FDD BTS frame in this section Depending on the position of the frame start the required computing time can be quite long Applying an external frame trigger can reduce the computing time Test setup 1 Connect the RF A output of the R amp S SMW200A to the input of the R amp S FSW 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference input REF OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S SMW200A coaxial cable with BNC connectors 3 Connect the external trigger input of the R amp S FSW TRIGGER INPUT to the exter nal trigger output USER 1 of the R amp S SMW200A Settings on the R amp S SMW200A 1 PRESET 2 Freq A 2 1175 GHz 3 Level 0 dBm SSS SS ES C ANN eee User Manual 1 176 8968 02 01 102 Measurement 2 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power Baseband A gt CDMA Standards gt 3GPP FDD General tab Link Direction gt DOWN FORWARD Basestations tab Test Setups Models gt Test Model 1 16 channels Basestations tab Select Basestation BS 1 ON General tab 3GPP FDD gt STATE gt ON RF A On o
160. ge 128 Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings The display is only set once it is not adapted further if the measurement settings are changed again Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 127 Restore Scale Window Restores the default scale settings in the currently selected window 5 1 4 3 Frequency Settings Frequency settings for the input signal can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Select the Input gt Frequency menu item Code Domain Analysis Frequency Center 13 25 GHz Center Frequency Stepsize Stepsize Center Value 1 0 MHz Frequency Offset Value 0 0 Hz Comer KOUN oenn A O A N O 62 Center Frequency Stepsize ssssssssssssssesssese nennen nennen tentes 62 FREQUENCY OfSeL incerto eret aen i dl e ITI DR e T LR 63 Center frequency Defines the normal center frequency of the signal 0 Hz lt center s fmax fmax and Spanmin depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet Note For file input you can shift the center frequency of the current measurement compared to the stored measurement data The maximum shift depends on the chan nel s current analysis bandwidth 2 ABW ABW CFshift CF file i channel If the file do
161. ge 198 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 200 Markers Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 199 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 201 Peak Search N Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 198 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 200 Search Minimum NY Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 199 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 201 Marker To CPICH Sets the marker to the CPICH channel Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CPICh on page 197 Marker To PCCPCH Sets the marker to the PCCPCH channel Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PCCPch on page 198 7 How to Perform Measurements in 3GPP FDD Applications The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform measurements with the 3GPP FDD applications To perform Code Domain Analysis 1 Open a new channel or replace an existing one and select
162. gnal demodulation This is the case if the DUT filters the signal Remote command SENSe CDPower FILTer STATe on page 139 Capture Mode Captures a single slot or one complete frame Remote command SENSe CDPower BASE on page 139 Capture Length Frames Defines the capture length amount of frames to record Remote command SENSe CDPower IQLength on page 139 Frame To Analyze Defines the frame to be analyzed and displayed Remote command SENSe CDPower FRAMe VALue on page 158 Capture Time This setting is read only It indicates the capture time determined by the capture length and sample rate Capture Average Count Defines the number of captures to be performed in the single capture mode Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed If the values O or 1 are set one capture is performed The Capture Average Count is available from the Meas Setup menu The Capture Average Count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set this value also deter mines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures Code Domain Analysis In continuous capture mode if Capture Average Count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 captures For Capture Average Count 71 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are performed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 140 SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt on page 140 Synchr
163. he R amp S SMW200A coaxial cable with BNC connectors 3 Connect the external trigger input of the R amp S FSW TRIGGER INPUT to the exter nal trigger output USER 1 of the R amp S SMW200A Settings on the R amp S SMW200A 1 PRESET ree User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 106 Measurement 4 Determining the Peak Code Domain Error Freq A 2 1175 GHz Level 0 dBm Baseband A gt CDMA Standards gt 3GPP FDD General tab Link Direction gt DOWN FORWARD Basestations tab Test Setups Models gt Test Model 1 16 channels Basestations tab Select Basestation BS 1 ON General tab SGPP FDD STATE ON RF A On oO o nu oo b o wm Settings in the R amp S VSE File gt Preset gt All Measurement Group Setup Replace Channel gt 3GPP FDD BTS Input and Output gt Amplitude Reference level 0 dBm Input and Output gt Frequency Center frequency 2 1175 GHz Meas Setup gt Scrambling Code 0000 Input and Output gt Trigger Trigger Source External Trigger 1 Dn og gg m Replace the Composite EVM display by a Peak Code Domain Error display a Select the Ell Change window icon from the Composite EVM window title bar b Select the Peak Code Domain Error result display 8 Input and Output gt Scale Auto Scale Once Results The following is displayed e Window 1 Code Domain Power of signal e Window 2 Peak Code Domain Error projection of e
164. he application firmware is in line with the 3GPP standard Third Generation Partnership Project with Release 5 Signals that meet the conditions for channel configuration of test models 1 to 4 according to the 3GPP stand ard e g W CDMA signals using FDD can be measured with the 3GPP FDD BTS application R amp S VSE K72 performs Base Transceiver Station BTS measurements for downlink signals as well as User Equipment UE measurements for uplink signals In particular the R amp S VSE 3GPP FDD Measurements application features e Code domain analysis providing results like code domain power EVM peak code domain error etc Time alignment error determination This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application pro vides including remote control operation Functions that are not discussed in this manual are the same as in the I Q Analyzer application and are described in the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product VSE html 2 1 Starting the 3GPP FDD Application The 3GPP FDD measurements require a special application on the R amp S VSE It is acti vated by creating a new measurement channel in 3GPP FDD mode To activate the 3GPP FDD application 1 Q Channel Select the Add Channel function in the Sequence tool window A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and appli
165. he determined bits or the symbol EVM can be displayed for an active channel R amp S9SVSE K72 Measurements and Result Display 3 1 1 The power of a code channel is always measured in relation to its symbol rate within the code domain It can be displayed either as absolute values or relative to the total signal or the CPICH channel By default the power relative to the CPICH channel is displayed The total power may vary depending on the slot since the power can be controlled on a per slot basis The power in the CPICH channel on the other hand is constant in all slots For all measurements performed in a slot of a selected channel bits symbols symbol power EVM the actual slot spacing of the channel is taken as a basis rather than the CPICH slots The time reference for the start of a slot is the CPICH slot If code chan nels contain a timing offset the start of a specific slot of the channel differs from the start of the reference channel CPICH Thus the power per channel display may not be correct If channels with a timing offset contain a power control circuit the channel power versus time display may provide better results The composite EVM peak code domain error and composite constellation measure ments are always referenced to the total signal Remote command CONF WCDP MEAS WCDP see CONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASurement on page 116 Code Domain Parameters Two different types of measurement result
166. hes of the chip constellation at the selected slot are transferred lt Re1 gt lt Im1 gt lt Re2 gt lt Im2 gt lt Re2560 gt Im2560 The values are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot Power vs Symbol When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the power of each symbol at the selected slot is transferred The values indicate the difference to the reference power in dB The number of the symbols depends on the spreading factor of the selected chan nel NOFSymbols 10 2 8 CodeCiass Symbol Constellation When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the real and the imaginary branches are transferred lt Re o gt Imo lt Re gt lt Im gt lt Re gt Im The number of level values depends on the spreading factor Spreading factor Number of level values 512 5 256 10 128 20 64 40 16 160 8 320 4 640 Retrieving Results 10 8 2 11 Symbol EVM When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the real and the imaginary branches are transferred Reg lt IMp gt lt Re gt lt Im gt lt Re gt Im The number of level values depends on the spreading factor Spreading factor Number of level values 512 5 256 10 128 20 64 40 32 80 16 160 8 320 4 640 10 8 2 12 Bitstream When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the
167. ignment Error measurement you must change the measurement type Do one of the following Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measurement button e From the Meas Setup menu select Select Measurement In the Select Measurement dialog box select the Time Alignment Error measure ment 5 2 1 Configuration Overview For Time Alignment Error measurements the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing Time Alignment Error Measurements Code Domain Analyzer Swap VQ Off Input RF RRC Filter On Frequency 13 25 GHz Capture Mode Frame Ref Level 0 0 dBm Source Free Run Capture Length ii Scr Code 0 Att 10 0 dB Level Frame to Analyze 0 PE aic gt me Scrambling Code Input Frontend J Trigger Signal Capture _ Em rai a y Synchronization Channel Detection Analysis Sync Type CPICH Trace 1 Clear Write Ant 1 Mode P CPICH Ant 2 Mode P CPICH GD eoe Species for Ress s 1 Select Measurement See chapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 11 2 Scrambling Code See chapter 5 1 2 2 BTS Scrambling Code on page 50 3 Input Frontend See chapter 5 1 3 Data Input and Output Settings on page 53 4 Optionally Trigger chapter 5 1 5 Trigger Settings on page 63 5 Signal Capture See chapter 5 1 6 Signal Capture Data Acquisit
168. imum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 94 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 94 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event 10 9 3 Zooming into the Display 10 9 3 1 Using the Single Zoom bISPlayWINDowsnsZOOMAREA ctr tb ete beta re tati 201 BISPlay WINDowsnz ZOONMES T AT ooi i uote aa rit ta cete eso Eo avro toot In 202 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm M7 User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 201 R amp S VSE K72 Remote Commands for 3GPP FDD Measurements 10 9 3 2 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is
169. in the code domain If the code belongs to a detected channel the entire channel is highlighted User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 33 R amp SSVSE K72 Measurement Basics If the selected channel is not active only the first code belonging to the corresponding division is highlighted In the example for the inactive channel number 5 32 the first code in the sixth division on the scale with 16 codes per division is highlighted That corresponds to code number 80 with the scale based on 512 divisions Special channels PCCPCH SCH CPICH DPCH In order to control the data transmission between the sender and the receiver specific symbol must be included in the transmitted data for example the scrambling code of the sender or the used spreading factor as well as synchronization data for different channels This data is included in special data channels defined by the 3GPP standard which use fixed codes in the code domain Thus they can be detected easily by the receiver The Primary Common Control Physical Channel PCCPCH must always be contained in the signal As the name implies it is responsible for common control of the channels during transmission The Synchronization Channel SCH is a time reference and responsible for synchro nizing the individual channels Another important channel is the Common Pilot Channel CPICH which continuously transmits the sender s scrambling code This channel is used to identify the sender but al
170. including the pilot length Usage Query only Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Channel Table on page 15 See Code Domain Power on page 17 TRACe lt n gt DATA TPVSlot This command returns a comma separated list of absolute Power vs Slot results for all 16 slots In contrast to the TRACE lt t gt parameter result absolute values are returned Return values lt SlotNumber gt 0 15 CPICH slot number lt Level gt dBm Slot level value Example CALC2 FEED XTIM CDP PVSLot ABSolute Sets the evaluation for window 2 to POWER VS SLOT TRAC2 DATA TPVSlot Returns a list of absolute frequency errors for all slots in window 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 26 Analysis 10 9 Analysis The following commands define general result analysis settings concerning the traces and markers MEC DINERO RSS 192 XE DIGNAS 193 e Zooming into the BIsplay ice ise tL le Lee Eo d E a 201 10 9 1 Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen In 3GPP FDD applications only one trace per window can be configured for Code Domain Analysis DISPlayEWINDow en TRAGest MODE itte tusa coz uz anco esca toten eaae 192 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe cessere rennen nennen 193 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode Parameters Mode WRI
171. indow lt t gt 1 Trace lt m gt 1 4 Marker Activating 3GPP FDD Measurements 10 3 Activating 3GPP FDD Measurements 3GPP FDD measurements require a special application in the R amp S VSE The common commands for configuring and controlling measurement channels as well as blocks and sequences are also used in the R amp S VSE 3GPP FDD Measurements application They are described in the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual 10 4 Selecting a Measurement The following commands are required to define the measurement type in a remote environment For details on available measurements see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 11 CONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASurement seessssssssssseseseenenen enne nnne 116 CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement esses 116 CONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASurement Type This command selects the type of 3GPP FDD BTS base station tests Parameters Type WCDPower Code domain power measurement This selection has the same effect as command INSTrument SELect BWCD TAERror Time Alignment Error measurement RST WCDPower Example CONF WCDP MEAS TAE Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Result List on page 30 See Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table on page 73 CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement Type This command selects the 3GPP FDD UE user equipment tests
172. ing the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier if available of the instrument in use are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 157 Code Domain Analysis Lower Level Hysteresis Auto Settings Configuration When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier if available of the instrument in use are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 157 5 1 10 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar SIONS ZOOM Ee 80 Multiple ZOOM M V HP 80 Restore Original Display teret reor tk R Etre SERRE qe RES IDEA Rue Ra ex Masa quip 80 R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode ttes 81 Single Zoom Ba A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an
173. ion on page 66 6 Synchronization See chapter 5 1 7 Synchronization BTS Measurements Only on page 68 7T Analysis See chapter 6 Analysis on page 83 8 Display Configuration See chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 14 and Evaluation Methods on page 30 All settings required for Time Alignment Error measurements are identical to those described for Code Domain Analysis see chapter 5 1 Code Domain Analysis on page 46 Evaluation Range 6 Analysis 6 1 General result analysis settings concerning the evaluation range trace markers etc can be configured via the Analysis button in the Overview The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 10 9 Analysis on page 192 e Evaluation age ee a ERN A XAERERCUEEAEREANDI SU NERTR EN EXER aai 83 e Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS Measurements sssssssss 85 e Code Domain Analysis Settings UE Measurements ssssssssssss 87 NEU o anon ean E tes concise divag das aan ed ssa a a ra aai eaan a aA 88 IVAN IS ANILLOS SS 89 Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which channel slot or frame is evaluated in the result display Frame To Analyze cce cbei a o ER ei o o ed Rated aa 84 Branch UE measurements only sse enne 84 i E 84 L Selecting a Different Branch for a Window
174. ion is displayed green at the points of the diagram the channel should appear due to its spreading code and a message INCORRECT PILOT is displayed in the status bar In this case check the pilot symbols for those channels using the Power vs Slot or the Bitstream evaluations Optionally all QPSK modulated channels can also be recognized without pilot symbols see HSDPA UPA on page 49 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CDPower See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 CALC MARK FUNC WCDP RES CDP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower BTS RESult on page 174 CALC MARK FUNC WCDP MS RES CDP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower MS RESult on page 176 TRACe lt n gt DATA CTABle TRACe lt n gt DATA PWCDp TRACe lt n gt DATA CWCDp Code Domain Error Power Code Domain Error Power is the difference in power between the measured and the ideal signal The unit is dB There are no other units for the y axis 3G FDD BTS 3 Code Domain Error Power 64 Code Code 511 Fig 3 4 Code Domain Error Power Display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CDEPower see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Composite Constellation The Composite Constellation evaluation analyzes the entire signal for one single slot If a large number of channels is to be analyzed the results are superimposed In that case the bene
175. ion on the x axis Range The value range and unit depend on the measure ment and scale of the x axis Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See m Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 4 on page 90 See X value on page 91 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only Manual operation See m Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 4 on page 90 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode The unit depends on the application of the command Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON
176. ion reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 of the instrument in use if available User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 137 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 137 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 138 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate on page 138 Frontend Settings Frequency amplitude and y axis scaling settings represent the frontend of the mea surement setup e Amplitude Settinijs iinaoienr eibi bee tore e Henan A Fi Ee LEER ARR ERR 57 ME VAKS clo REET 60 e Fega
177. ion tests are provided here They describe how operating and measurement errors can be avoided using correct presettings The measurements are performed with R amp S VSE equipped with option R amp S VSE K72 It is assumed an instrument is connected and configured for input to the R amp S VSE soft ware See the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual Key settings are shown as examples to avoid measurement errors Following the cor rect setting the effect of an incorrect setting is shown The measurements are performed using the following instruments and accessories e The R amp S VSE with option R amp S VSE K72 3GPP FDD measurements e An R amp S FSW Signal and Spectrum Analyzer e The Vector Signal Generator R amp S SMW200A with option R amp S SMW K42 digital standard 3GPP FDD requires options R amp S SMW B10 R amp S SMW B13 and R amp S SMW B103 e 1 coaxial cable 50O approx 1 m N connector e 1 coaxial cable 500 approx 1 m BNC connector The following measurements are described e Measurement 1 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power 98 e Measurement 2 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power 102 e Measurement 3 Measuring the Composite EVM ssssssees 104 e Measurement 4 Determining the Peak Code Domain Error 106 Measurement 1 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power A code domain power measurement on one of the
178. is channel is determined SSCH Secondary Synchronization Channel The Secondary Synchronization Channel is a non orthogonal channel Only the power of this channel is determined PCCPCH Primary Common Control Physical Channel The Primary Common Control Physical Channel is also used to synchronize the signal in the case of SCH synchronization It is expected at code class 8 and code number 1 SCCPCH Secondary Common Control Physical Channel The Secondary Common Control Physical Channel is a QPSK modulated channel without any pilot symbols In the 3GPP test models this channel can be found in code class 8 and code number 3 However the code class and code number need not be fixed and can vary For this reason the following rules are used to indicate the SCCPCH e Only one QPSK modulated channel without pilot symbols is detected and dis played as the SCCPCH Any further QPSK modulated channels without pilot symbols are not detected as active channels e fthe signal contains more than one channel without pilot symbols the channel that is received in the highest code class and with the lowest code number is displayed as the SCCPCH It is expected that only one channel of this type is included in the received signal According to this assumption this channel is probably the SCCPCH e If the application is configured to recognize all QPSK modulated channels without pilot symbols see HSDPA UPA on page 49 and one of
179. isi ogersport OTYPess uoces teniente oreet ce tee everyone eine setae Er E mensi R LES EC 137 OUTPut TRIGgers port PULSe IMMediate rre tton rte rrt en rennen 138 SIAT us QUEStionable S YNG NTRariSItiOn 2 55 12 22 ico ka e a eye echa co ke eee ca re eet ERES 205 STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRAMSitiOn cccccccccccsesseeeeeeeeceeseeeeeeeceesseseeeeeeseesssseeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeesaea 205 STATus QUEStionable SYNGL EVENItJ cuite tpe tre n re p etre eere rto ere eren 204 se EIE Np 185 TRAGCesns EDATA itii ie or orte Renee rt acf er reir Leer nuo PR Ed ede cu QVI E 186 So IB p 187 TRAC lt gt DATA ict iter a ene EE cod cce Aa gn bd terse 188 TRAGCesrns EDATA itii ie or rte eren rt acf d er reir Len rnv o EUR Ed ede cus QVI o ee E 189 S o SHEER tas 190 TRAGesRns DATA cem tto ge a chy oct EP td occ e rep n b dec pp de sd 190 TRAGesnsEDATAJ inei ce eig Ri Rer acr D Rep Ei ur Eee ne Env Edge cu DE o EO 191 TRIGE psjseiedHbapurc 133 TRIGger SEQuernce HOLDOoff TIME ttr rrr rn rr eene tene 133 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDofF 3 21 rrr rene rrt entrer c th rere Rene 133 TRIGger SEQuerice IFPower FlYS Teresls iai tette aee rere 133 TRIGger SEQuernce LEVel IFPOWSLF iete ttr trente rn etr re tren n re enne e ken 134 TRIGger SEQ
180. l cce oce tret ce td st regt e td ioc ce ed ee dead dE edu 48 e Datalnput and Output Settings rece heic dieci cerle e i aee 53 e Frontend SelUligg eae erat ERE eR Reo sex et eee ene stove kae esae Nue ERAN E P A RERIEA IRSE 57 LM odori m 63 Signal Capture Data Acqulsltigim 212 terr ertet te ne ens 66 e Synchronization BTS Measurements Only sss 68 Code Domain Analysis AME CILE e MEER RK 69 Automaie Saling cce rre tec eC RE Lr Du RR EE E REED EET ax d E ERE 78 DLE or rS CTI 80 Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement configuration an overview of the most important cur rently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the s Overview icon in the main toolbar or the Meas Setup gt Overview menu item Code Domain Analyzer Scramling Code 0 Swap VQ Off HSDPA UPA On Input RF RRC Filter On MIMO Off Frequency 13 25 GHz Capture Mode Frame Compressed Mode Off Ref Level 0 0 dBm Source Free Run Capture Length J Antenna Diversity off Att 10 0 dB Level Frame to Analyze 0 E ic Signal Description l Input Frontend Trigger l Signal Capture Tu ica gt me S mchironizati c ID a Analysi Sync Type CPICH Threshold 60 0 dB Channel No 0 256 Ant 1 Mode P CPICH Predef Tables Autosearch Slot No 0 Ant 2 Mode P CPICH Table Name Frame No 0 Power Ref CPICH Marker 1 off Trace 1 Clear
181. l section to the start of the analyzed frame In case of triggered data collection this difference is identical with the time difference of frame trigger trigger offset frame start If synchronization of the analyzer and input signal fails the value of Trigger to Frame is not significant IQ Offset DC offset of the signal in the selected slot in IQ Imbalance I Q imbalance of signals in the selected slot in 96 Avg Power Inact Average power of the inactive channels Chan Composite EVM The composite EVM is the difference between the test signal and the ideal refer ence signal in the selected slot in 96 See also Composite EVM on page 19 Pk CDE 15 ksps The Peak Code Domain Error projects the difference between the test signal and the ideal reference signal onto the selected spreading factor in the selected slot see Peak Code Domain Error on page 23 The spreading factor onto which projection is performed can be derived from the symbol rate indicated in brackets RHO Quality parameter RHO for each slot No of Active Chan The number of active channels detected in the signal in the selected slot Both the detected data channels and the control channels are considered active channels Avg RCDE Average Relative Code Domain Error over all channels detected with 64 QAM UE 4PAM modulation in the selected frame Carrier Frequency Error The maximum frequency error that can be compe
182. l table in order to copy or delete it Parameters Name file name RST RECENT Example CONF WCDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Name on page 73 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for the selected channel table Prior to this command the name of the channel table has to be defined with command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 150 The values of the table are defined with command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 152 Parameters Comment Example CONF WCDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name CONF WCDP CTAB COMM Comment for table 1 Defines a comment for the table CONF WCDP CTAB DATA 8 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 00 9 1 0 0 0 0 31 0 00 7 1 0 256 8 0 1 0 00 Defines the table values Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Comment on page 73 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME lt FileName gt This command creates a new channel table file or selects an existing channel table in order to copy or delete it Parameters lt FileName gt lt file name gt RST RECENT Example CONF WCDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Mode UE application only Manual operation See Name on page 73 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for the selected channel tabl
183. layed in the channel bar in 3GPP FDD applications for Code Domain Analysis Ref Level Reference level Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Channel Channel number code number and spreading factor CPICH Slot Slot of the CPICH channel Slot UE Power Power result mode e Absolute Relative to CPICH BTS application only e Relative to total power SymbRate Symbol rate of the current channel Capture UE application only basis for analysis slot or frame User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 9 Understanding the Display Information Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 3G FDD BTS 1 Code Domain Power Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in 3GPP applications 0 Color coding for windows of same channel 1 Edit result display function 2 Channel name 3 Window number 4 Window type 5 Trace color trace number trace mode 6 Dock undock window function 7 Close window function Diagram area The diagram area displays the results according to the selected result displays see chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 14 Diagram footer information For most graphical evaluations the diagram footer beneath the diagram contains scal ing information for the x axis where applicable e Start channel chip frame slot e Channel chip fra
184. le TRAC2 DATA TRACEL Returns the trace data from trace 1 in window 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Code Domain Error Power on page 18 See Composite Constellation on page 18 See Composite EVM on page 19 See EVM vs Chip on page 20 See Mag Error vs Chip on page 22 See Peak Code Domain Error on page 23 See Phase Discontinuity vs Slot on page 24 See Phase Error vs Chip on page 24 See Power vs Symbol on page 26 See Result Summary on page 27 See Symbol Constellation on page 27 See Symbol EVM on page 28 See Symbol Magnitude Error on page 29 See Symbol Phase Error on page 29 TRACe lt n gt DATA ABITstream This command returns the bit streams of all 15 slots one after the other The output format may be REAL UINT or ASCII The number of bits of a 16QAM modulated chan nel is twice that of a QPSK modulated channel the number of bits of a G4QAM modu lated channel is three times that of a QPSK modulated channel This query is only available if the evaluation for the corresponding window is set to Bit stream using the LAY ADD WIND XTIM CDP BSTReam command see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 Retrieving Results The output format is identical to that of the TRAC DATA TRAC command for an acti vated Bitstream evaluation see chapter 10 8 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 178 The only difference is the number of symbols which are evaluated The
185. lected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 194 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 195 X value Defines the position of the marker on the x axis channel slot symbol depending on evaluation Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 195 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 194 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 194 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 195 Markers All Markers Off y Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command
186. lected slot is transferred The number of the symbols depends on the spreading factor of the selected channel NOFSymbols 10 2 9 CodeClass 10 8 3 Retrieving Trace Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the trace data from the CDA and Time Alignment Error measurements Note that for these measurements only 1 trace per window can be configured FORMat DATA TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 185 e TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE1 e TRACe lt n gt DATA ABITstream e TRACe lt n gt DATA ATRace1 e TRACe lt n gt DATA CTABle Retrieving Results e TRACe n DATA CWCDp e TRACe n DATA FINal1 e TRACe n DATA PWCDp e TRACe n DATA TPVSlot FORMat DATA Format This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S VSE to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S VSE The R amp S VSE automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Parameters Format ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format For I Q data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed
187. lot symbols of the 3GPP standard Possible causes are e Incorrectly sent pilot symbols in the received frame e Low signal to noise ratio SNR of the W CDMA signal Oneor more code channels have a significantly lower power level compared to the total power The incorrect pilots are detected in these channels because of low channel SNR e One or more channels are sent with high power ramping In slots with low relative power to total power the pilot symbols might be detected incorrectly check the signal quality by using the symbol constellation display Introduction 10 Remote Commands for 3GPP FDD Mea 10 1 surements The following commands are required to perform measurements in R amp S VSE 3GPP FDD Measurements applications in a remote environment It is assumed that the R amp S VSE has already been set up for remote control in a net work as described in the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual General R amp S VSE Remote Commands The application independent remote commands for general tasks on the R amp S VSE are also available for 3GPP FDD measurements and are described in the R amp S VSE User Manual In particular this comprises the following functionality e Controlling instruments and capturing data e Managing Settings and Results e Setting Up the Instrument Using the Status Register Channel specific commands Apart from a few general commands on the R amp S VSE most commands refer to the curre
188. lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 93 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 94 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Analysis The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 94 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 94 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Po
189. lution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e Numere Values ie rer ina HERE pereo Fax Ve rs aver toes E TRUE date Gee aera RARE RN 113 CESSIT UT NTSM M MMMSEE 114 e Obharacter Dolan rerte et trie enu Pete e Fee Y rr v bd o e aa d der Ed 115 Character SUIS ccrte er nit ete e adea rdi et ene ecce ede 115 S BOE DA a a a E E a ee 115 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz 10 1 6 2 Introduction Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default
190. main Error Power CEVM Composite EVM CTABle Channel Table EVMChip EVM vs Chip FESLot Frequency Error vs Slot MECHip Magnitude Error vs Chip MTABle Marker table PCDerror Peak Code Domain Error PDSLot Phase Discontinuity vs Slot PECHip Phase Error vs Chip PSLot Power vs Slot PSYMbol Power vs Symbol RSUMmary Result Summary SCONst Symbol Constellation SEVM Symbol EVM Configuring the Result Display Parameter value Window type SMERror Symbol Magnitude Error SPERror Symbol Phase Error LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt To query the name and index of all windows in all measurement channels use the LAYout GLOBal CATalog WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result VOU TENE Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to quer
191. me slot per division e Stop channel chip frame slot For the Bitstream evaluation the diagram footer indicates e Channel format type and modulation type HS PDSCH only e Number of data bits e Number of TPC bits e Number of TFCI bits e Number of pilot bits The bit numbers are indicated in the order they occur Status bar information The software status errors and warnings and any irregularities in the software are indi cated in the status bar at the bottom of the R amp S VSE window Code Domain Analysis 3 Measurements and Result Display 3 1 The 3GPP FDD applications provide several different measurements for signals according to the 3GPP FDD standard The main and default measurement is Code Domain Analysis Furthermore a Time Alignment Error measurement is provided Result display windows For each measurement a separate measurement channel is activated Each measure ment channel can provide multiple result displays which are displayed in individual windows The measurement windows can be rearranged and configured in the R amp S VSE to meet your requirements All windows that belong to the same measure ment including the channel bar are indicated by a colored line at the top of the win dow title bar gt To add further result displays for the 3GPP FDD channel select the 6 Add Win dow icon from the toolbar or select the Window gt New Window menu item For details on working with channels and windo
192. measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window 5 1 2 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal e BIS Signal DoscrptlOti eteidr Eten d e E deine 48 e BTS Scrambling Cod eerte rte Re ex ERR Iden Fes seR a ER ERR ERR dE 50 e UE Signal Description UE Measurements 51 5 1 2 1 BTS Signal Description The settings available to describe the input signal in BTS measurements are described here Code Domain Analysis Scrambling Code Common HSDPA UPA On Compressed Mode MOSE e T MIMO d On Antenna Diversity State On Antenna Number es HSDPA PR C 49 Gornpressaed MOde erede RONN 49 uris IE 49 Antenas DIVOSI iuc dust uvae tait vct dee vase imt ve uta NO 50 Antenna NUImbOr cocer acere feeder ecce eae ee e ae Fe T cet d 50 HSDPA UPA If enabled the application detects all QPSK modulated channels without pilot symbols HSDPA channels and displays them in the channel table If the type of a channel c
193. ment Replace the default channel by a 3GPP FDD BTS channel named BTSMeasurement DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 10 Set the reference level to 10 dBm FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz Set the center Frequency to 2 1175 GHz CDP LCOD DVAL 0000 Change the scrambling code on the analyzer to 0000 TRIG SOUR EXT Set the trigger source to the external trigger TRIGGER INPUT connector DISP TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the current measurement INIT CONT OFF Stops continuous sweep SWE COUN 100 Set the number of sweeps to be performed to 100 INIT WAI Start a new measurement with 100 sweeps and wait for the end CALC MARK FUNC WCDP BTS RES TFR Retrieve the trigger to frame the offset between trigger event and start of first captured frame Result 0 00599987013 ms TRIG HOLD 100 us Change the trigger offset to 100 us trigger to frame value CALC MARK FUNC WCDP BTS RES TFR Retrieve the trigger to frame value Result 0 00599987013 ms 10 12 3 Measurement 3 Measuring the Composite EVM RST Reset the instrument INST CRE REPL IQ Analyzer BWCD BTSMeasurement Replace the default channel by a 3GPP FDD BTS channel named BTSMeasurement DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 10 Set the reference level to 10 dBm FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz Set the center Frequency to 2 1175 GHz TRIG SOUR EXT Set the trigger source to the external trigger 10 12 4 Programming Examples R amp S
194. meter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 10 11 Commands for Compatibility lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Commands for Compatibility The following commands are provided for compatibility to other signal analyzers only For new remote control programs use the specified alternative commands CAL Culate lt m gt FEED e
195. mples SGPPEDD is ntt edet ted Hte 209 Composite EVM 212 Incorrect scrambling code PCDE 25st 213 Reference Frequency 210 Relative code domain power 210 Triggered CDP inais 44212 PSOE scri tr addet edi nion 36 PwrAbs PwrRel m aieo cetera 17 R Range SCAG mr EUN 61 Qs cc 13 Average ERE 12 Reference frequency Measurement example eee 100 Reference Frequency Programming example enean ttes 210 Reference level sissisodan rei esed 58 Auto level t aasre 59 78 Displayed Reference pOWOE s occid te eri eeu agis e gne eet ieS 86 Remote commands B asicS OnSyDlax iosian manida an 110 Boolean valles etl etc oes 114 GapitaliZatiOI 3i venti Ln tr hr d ri neon coner ss 112 Character dala cere aii ick epa ence iine 115 Data blocks Numeric values Obsolete m Optional keywords 2 enne 112 Paramelets 2232 b ees exe t SES wh 113 Strings PS Uc t 112 Restoring Channel settings eMe dens 48 207 RESUME Display rtt eren tr 8 Result displays Market table detnr et pts 22 Result list Eval tiO M T ia a 30 Result summary Ghanneliresults 2 1 ente etg 13 Evaluation 27 General results 2 n rere een 12 Trace results a 180 ROSUIIS erai E eer eared ale 11 Calculated remote 2 eee ettet 174 Data format rem
196. multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets n next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 10 1 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets 10 1 5 10 1 6 10 1 6 1 Introduction Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESo
197. n SOM Se errem oce ede redde exon doce ree cane dice De ree x dnce ua 61 Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings determine how the instrument in use must process or display the expected input power levels Code Domain Analysis Amplitude settings are available via the Input amp Output Amplitude menu item Note that the availability of these settings depends on the instrument in use eee Reference Level r Input Settings Value 10 0 dBm Preamplifier On arum e Input Coupling Dc Unit dBm M Auto Level Bo RF Attenuation Electronic Attenuation State On Off Value 0 0 dB Mode Wem Manual Value 10 0 dB UE 58 L Shifting the Display Offset tette tnnt 58 Li Pr 59 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 59 FRE ASnUBtOl uideret deae Cede ie M RR Hee P A M eda de eds 59 L Attenuation Mode ValUue ccccccscsscssssesssssesesesecescsccessstsseseseseseseseseceseeees 59 Using Electronic AMSMU AON sas uci recen dett c lee tert edet dr e rete ce cedens 59 riput SQUINGS oie oe redeo aiid E rd Ever CAE rad c Er Re 60 xi CDI ORE i dtaancis Reaaciaae ease 60 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or
198. n gt DATA on page 185 Channel Table When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 5 values are transmitted for each channel e the class e the channel number the absolute level the relative level the timing offset For details on these parameters see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 185 Example The following example shows the results of a query for three channels with the follow ing configuration Channel Spreading factor Channel number Timing offset 1st 512 7 0 2nd 4 1 256 chips 3rd 128 255 2560 chips This yields the following result 9 7 40 20 0 2 1 40 20 256 7 255 40 20 2560 The channel order is the same as in the CDP diagram i e it depends on their position in the code domain of spreading factor 512 Code Domain Error Power When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 4 values are transmitted for each channel with code class 9 code class Highest code class of a downlink signal always set to 9 CC9 code number Code number of the evaluated CC9 channel 0 511 Retrieving Results CDEP Code domain error power value of the CC9 channel in dB channel flag Indicates whether the CC9 channel belongs to an assigned code channel 0b00 0d0 CC9 is inactive 0b01 0d1 CC9 channel belongs to an active code channel 0b11 0d3 CC9 channel belongs to an active code channel sent pilot symbols are incorrect
199. ndex number for mean power calculation of received and reference signal N number of chips at each CPICH slot um PE gt AN UNUS User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 19 R amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display 3G FDD BTS 3 Composite EVM Fig 3 6 Composite EVM display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements The measurement result consists of one composite EVM measurement value per slot In this case the measurement interval is the slot spacing of the CPICH timing offset of 0 chips referenced to the beginning of the frame Only the channels recognized as active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If an assigned channel is not recognized as active since pilot symbols are missing or incomplete the difference between the measurement and reference signal and the composite EVM is very high Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CEVM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 EVM vs Chip EVM vs Chip activates the Error Vector Magnitude EVM versus chip display The EVM is displayed for all chips of the selected slot Note In UE measurements if the measurement interval Halfslot is selected for eval uation 30 slots are displayed instead of the usual 15 see Measurement Interval on page 87 The EVM is calculated by the root of the square difference of received signal and refer ence signal The reference signal is estimated from the channel configuration of all active ch
200. nen neret iaaiiai CAL Culate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUMILEFT sccccssccsecesecscencencrasstsqencoaneacentensocienscuseeneanecnscaosascancoaceneenCenseen GALCulate n MARKer m MlINimu m NENXT 2cxn teint runner eaa onn than kn nnn vo rae T ER EE Pn GALCulatesn MARKer m MlINimu m RIGHL i iiie cutter ttn eher rk t iaa CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK GALGulatesn s MARKOTF SETS X uenis ce ern rtr rennen d exe de n RR ERE Ge n ded e a de ea eX TENER EXER 194 GALGulatesn MARKersmo Y carere erri axes eri eR E PORE TEN EXKL ea Re RR E ELE SE Pea 194 CAbCGulatesn MARIersm ST AEG eset cases cos eene opor ek imet RE p senate CX Or Ve ve EE P IRAN ETEO ARENES 194 GONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle CATalOg rtt a nnn eR tena 149 GONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COMMAent 5 nra rt erret rene teer teh hh inr eer EE naa 151 GONFigure WGDPower MS CTABIe COPY isrener T rti errare OX HEURE 0e YE EEEE E 149 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA GCONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA HSDPocCh 21er ettet nnn inn Reno 154 CONFigure WGDPower MS CTABIe DEbLele rrrrr ern ttr trente y epe PR 9 Sere e eH EA ERES EX OE CER CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa tr rtp rra tnnt nen kn nane rr nga CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa EDPCc d GONFigure WCDPowerMS CTABle NAME cuss sacecssenescosnedersiiedaduvanteosicen e t RE Tere ERN epu hi Spr peres EE CY RF sa GONFigure WCDPower MS CTA
201. ng Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters Frame numeric value Range 0 CAPTURE LENGTH 1 RST 1 Example CDP FRAM VAL 1 Manual operation See Frame To Analyze on page 67 SENSe CDPower SLOT lt SlotNumber gt This command selects the CPICH slot number to be evaluated Parameters lt SlotNumber gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 Example SENS CDP SLOT 3 Manual operation See Slot on page 84 SENSe CDPower MAPPing lt SignalBranch gt This command switches between and Q branches of the signal for all evaluations if not specified otherwise using CALCulate lt n gt CDPower Mapping on page 159 Parameters lt SignalBranch gt IQ RST Q Example CDP MAPP Q Mode UE application only CALCulate lt n gt CDPower Mapping lt SignalBranch gt This command adjusts the mapping for the evaluations Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power in a specific window Parameters lt SignalBranch gt l Q AUTO l The l branch of the signal will be used for evaluation Q The Q branch of the signal will be used for evaluation AUTO The branch selected by the SENSe CDPower MAPPing command will be used for evaluation RST AUTO Example CALC CDP MAPPING AUTO 10 6 10 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Mode UE application only Manual operation See Branch UE measurements only on page 84 See Selecting a Differen
202. ng the OBlpuls codice rst e e rade etc eu aiid 125 10 6 2 1 RF Input dizi gestis E 123 INPut FIETecHPASSESTATe iiie ct cc cceedenctacevtl a vuv eor yp ELA Deng Elar 123 IN PutPIETer VIG STATS enia REC tota rea AA RR RR REO DUI eren E Ene L eR 124 INPORIM PEG ane m LE 124 NPU SEL e SAS 124 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 54 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the instrument in use in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional high pass filter hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP FILT HPAS ON Turns on the filter Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 54 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements INPut FILTer YIG STATe
203. nna STATe on page 142 for new remote control programs Parameters lt Pattern gt 1 fixed usage of Pattern 1 according to standard 2 fixed usage of Pattern 2 according to standard RST 2 Example SENS CDP UCP PATT 1 Mode BTS application only SENSe CDPower UCPich STATe lt State gt Defines whether the common pilot channel CPICH is defined by a user defined posi tion instead of its default position If enabled the user defined position must be defined using SENSe CDPower UCPich CODE on page 208 This command only applies to antenna 1 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna CODE on page 141 for new remote control pro grams Programming Examples R amp S VSE K72 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS CDP UCP ON Mode BTS application only 10 12 Programming Examples R amp S VSE K72 The following programming examples are based on the measurement examples described in chapter 8 Measurement Examples on page 98 for manual operation The measurements are performed using the following devices and accessories e The R amp S VSE with option R amp S VSE K72 3GPP FDD measurements e An R amp S FSW Signal and Spectrum Analyzer e A Vector Signal Generator R amp S SMW200A with option R amp S SMW K42 digital standard 3GPP FDD requires options R amp S SMW B10 R amp S SMW B13 and R amp S SMW B103 e 1 c
204. nsated is specified in table 3 2 as a function of the synchronization mode Transmitter and receiver should be synchronized as far as possible Table 3 2 Maximum frequency error that can be compensated SYNC mode ANTENNA DIV Max Freq Offset CPICH X 5 0 kHz SCH OFF 1 6 kHz SCH ANT 1 330 Hz SCH ANT 2 330 Hz Table 3 3 Channel specific code domain power results Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted Channel Slot No BTS measurements only Channel slot number determined by combining the value of the selected CPICH and the channel s timing offset Channel Mapping UE measurements only Branch onto which the channel is mapped I or Q specified by the standard Chan Power Abs Channel power absolute User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 13 Code Domain Analysis Chan Power Rel Channel power relative referenced to CPICH or total signal power Timing Offset Offset between the start of the first slot in the channel and the start of the analyzed 3GPP FDD BTS frame RCDE Relative Code Domain Error for the complete frame of the selected channel Symbol EVM Peak and average of the results of the error vector magnitude evaluation No of Pilot Bits Number of pilot bits of the selected channel Modulation Type BTS measurements Modulation type of an HSDPA channel High speed physical data channels can be modulated with QPSK 16 QAM or 64
205. ntly active channel Thus always remember to activate a 3GPP FDD channel before starting a remote program for a 3GPP FDD measurement After a short introduction the tasks specific to the 3GPP FDD application are described here LAM AOD UCUOI e cians 110 e Common SUMXES cocci eie en ENDE EIER DH RR 115 e Activating 3GPP FDD Measurements sess 116 e Selecting a Measilrelmielit sissies eere nette etel td de dd 116 e Restoring the Default Configuration Preset sseseceeeeeneee 117 e Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements 117 e Configuring the Result Display essere 163 e JRelrevilg RESUS ics aces nee ette d e eee e tll b d re e rr 174 LEE UD LICERET 192 e Querying the Status Reglsters eiii ecee te ra tensa pnta a ERE neu Ren k ua 203 e Commands for Compatlbility 2 cn dlc rtt eo i re tere bed es 206 e Programming Examples R amp S VSE K72 ite aec 209 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one R amp SSVSE K72 Remote Commands for 3GPP FDD Measurements way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries
206. nts in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks in the software are provided in the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes List of remote commands Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Index Typographical Conventions 1 2 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands program code File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Starting the 3GPP FDD Application 2 Welcome to the 3GPP FDD Applications The R amp S VSE 3GPP FDD Measurements application applications add functionality to the R amp S VSE to perform code domain analysis or power measurements according to the 3GPP standard FDD mode T
207. o apparent difference in measurement accuracy of the code domain power measurement e Above a frequency error of 5 kHz the probability of an impaired synchroniza tion increases With continuous measurements at times all channels are dis played in blue with almost the same level e Above a frequency error of approx 7 kHz a CDP measurement cannot be per formed The R amp S VSE displays all possible codes in blue with a similar level 3GFDD BTS 1 Code Domain Power iClw rm mW els n esults C ite Fig 8 2 Measurement Example 1 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power with Incorrect Center Frequency 3 Reset the frequency to 2 1175 GHz both on the R amp S SMW200A and in the R amp S VSE software 8 1 3 Behaviour with Incorrect Scrambling Code A valid CDP measurement can be carried out only if the scrambling code set in the R amp S VSE is identical to that of the transmitted signal Settings on the R amp S SMW200A e Basestationss tab gt BS 1 gt Common tab Scrambling Code hex 0000 a a E E User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 101 R amp S VSE K72 _ Measurement Examples pae H M ee Settings in the R amp S VSE e Meas Setup gt Scrambling Code 0001 Result The CDP display shows all possible codes with approximately the same level 3G FDD BTS 1 Code Domain Power 1cdrw 8 Fig 8 3 Measurement Example 1 Measurin
208. oaxial cable 50O approx 1 m N connector e 1 coaxial cable 500 approx 1 m BNC connector o Prerequisites in the R amp S VSE software It is assumed an R amp S FSW named MyFSW is connected and configured for input to the R amp S VSE software See the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual Only the commands required to control the R amp S VSE K72 application and the analyzer are provided not the signal generator Test setup 1 Connect the RF A output of the R amp S SMW200A to the input of the R amp S VSE 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S VSE to the reference input REF OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S SMW200A coaxial cable with BNC connectors 3 Connect the external trigger input of the R amp S VSE TRIGGER INPUT to the exter nal trigger output of the R amp S SMW200A TRIGOUT1 of PAR DATA Programming Examples R amp S VSE K72 Settings on the R amp S SMW200A Setting value Preset Frequency 2 1175 GHz Level 0 dBm Digital standard 3GPP FDD Link direction DOWN FORWARD Test model Test Model 1 16 channels Base station BS 1 Digital standard State ON Scrambling code 0000 The following measurements are described e Measurement 1 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power 210 e Measurement 2 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power 212 e Measurement 3 Measuring the Composit
209. ode UE application only CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa EDPCc lt State gt This command activates or deactivates the E DPCCH entry in a predefined channel table Parameters lt State gt RST OFF Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB EDAT EDPC ON Mode UE application only Automatic Settings Useful commands for adjusting settings automatically described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 127 SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch IMMediate on page 119 Remote commands exclusive to adjusting settings automatically CONFigure WCDPower BTS ASCale STATe essen 156 CONFigure WCDPower BTS MCARr rier STATe sss enn 156 ISENSeJAD JuSESALIE iiie idee ae e ponant desea E ne eR xE E ER OD R TAA 156 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation eese nennen nnns 156 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURatiom MODE 221 2 22 rere ti eco ntt tet tate aa 157 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer sesesssssssesenene nennen 157 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer sssssseseseseeeeeerere nnne 157 SENSGADIUSREE Vl E 158 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS ASCale STATe State Activate this command if multiple carriers are used In this case the autoscaling func tion automatically changes the level settings if the center frequency is change
210. oe BEY e INPut GAIN VALUe sen i torn rtr tnn e etn rr en rt n ne e e ne de Ere aen dispu ore ly sopsziadi te LAYout ADD WINDow EAYout GATalogEWINDOWJT rn rnnt snutinsevoubevsdyecosaedenaviapoecescstashetactedsuedyseavestnaasiedivnevsceoeanantiaaiveds 170 EAYout GEOBal ADDDEWIINDOWJS ciue trarre tied rp rni ra exe ebore ERE REC SEU ROX YE EY FO E SEU EEEE 163 EAYeut GEOBal CATalogEWINDOwWg iron entretien etre ren eres 165 LAYout GLOBal REMove WINDow EAYeut GLOBaEREPLEace WINDOW 2 int tnr nn rn ret rte cen een rr en terret 167 EAYoutIDENtTIyEWINDOW ott teer rte isara rtt t even tr EAE SEENTE DEEA TEN OYIN ATEST 170 EAY out SEMovVel WINDOW oec curat creato ta eere e et E epe enc Y Menag nx enc tero XM PORE IDE t ax FUN Cel FOX S UE ue 171 EAYout REPLace WINDOW tn ctt rr tene rtt ren errori ern rer etr nere exea 171 LAYOUCWINDOWSIS ADD tertre eec LM Lu Ek 171 LAY out WINDow lt n gt IDENtify LAY out WINDOW lt n gt i REMOVG ise i terret Eea E SENEE TRETEN e cag ise e E RYE RS RE coat PAY OUCV WINDOWS REPLACE ies orte EEE erts EEE aS OaE AEE AEE AAE SEEI OUTPu ut TRIGgersporte DIR ACEION pee tte erret ae Per ctp de ge uds 137 OUTPut IRIGger port lEVel i erri ene mr eet eh trarre a TES irr ETSEAN 137 OUTPul T
211. on Remote command CONF WCDP MEAS TAER See CONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASurement on page 116 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion TAERror RESult on page 174 User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 31 4 Measurement Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in 3GPP FDD tests and measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configu ration settings Basic principle The basic principle of 3GPP FDD frequency division duplex is that the communication between a base station and several mobile stations is performed in the same fre quency band and in the same time slots The seperation of the data for the different mobile stations is achieved by using CDMA Code Division Multiple Access In this technique channels are distinguished by using different orthogonal codes Scrambling codes Each base station uses a unique scrambling code The mobile station can only demod ulate the base station signal if it knows which scrambling code was used by the base station Thus in order to demodulate the data in the 3GPP FDD applications you must either specify the scrambling code explicitely or the application can perform an automatic search to detect the scrambling code itself Channels codes and symbol rate In signals according to the 3GPP FDD standard the data is transmitted in channels These channels are based on orthogonal codes and can have different data r
212. onization BTS Measurements Only For BTS tests the individual channels in the input signal need to be synchronized to detect timing offsets in the slot spacings These settings are described here Synchronize to EZB Antenna 2 cPicHmode EIB ncs S CPICH Code Nr 0 S CPICH Antenna Pattern Synchromntzaton Type eue enne Eee dat a E R E ada tt hte or aedes 68 Antennal 7 Altenmngs entree Eee re nae Eo SEP seres oer ae ape eer Ya E ED Ga e FDA Pag EC e Ve Pee EE ed dud 68 L CPICH ModE isst toas ex d r imas etr cdit 69 m rere bei NOE 69 S OPICH Antenna Palterfj oai tt re te etr beraten etc 69 Synchronization Type Defines whether the signal is synchronized to the CPICH or the synchronization chan nel SCH CPICH The 3GPP FDD application assumes that the CPICH control channel is present in the signal and attempts to synchronize to this channel If the signal does not contain CPICH synchronization fails SCH The 3GPP FDD application synchronizes to the signal without assum ing the presence of a CPICH This setting is required for measure ments on test model 4 without CPICH While this setting can also be used with other channel configurations it should be noted that the probability of synchronization failure increases with the number of data channels Remote command SENSe CDPower STYPe on page 142 Antenna1 Antenna2 Synchronization is configured for each diversity antenna individually on separate
213. or Code Domain Analysis on page 14 Return values lt CodeClass gt 2 9 Code class of the channel lt ChannelNo gt 0 511 Code number of the channel lt AbsLevel gt dBm Absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel slot lt RelLevel gt Relative level of the code channel at the selected channel slot referenced to CPICH or total power lt TimingOffset gt 0 38400 chips Timing offset of the code channel to the CPICH frame start The value is measured in chips The step width is 256 chips in the case of code class 2 to 8 and 512 chips in the case of code class 9 lt PilotLength gt The length of the pilot symbols According to the 3GPP stand ard the pilot length range depends on the code class Range 0 2 4 8 16 Default unit symbols lt ActiveFlag gt 0 1 Flag to indicate whether a channel is active 1 or not 0 lt ChannelType gt Channel type For details see table 10 2 Range 0 16 Retrieving Results lt ModType gt Modulation type of the code channel at the selected channel slot 2 QPSK 4 16 QAM 15 NONE There is no power in the selected channel slot slot is switched OFF Range 2 4 15 lt Reserved gt for future use Example TRAC DATA CWCDp Returns a list of channel information for each channel in ascend ing order Usage Query only Manual operation See Channel Table on page 15 See Code Domain Power on page 17 TRACe lt n gt DATA FINal1 This
214. or detection Symbol rate Channel number Whether TFCI is used Timing offset if applicable Number of pilot bits for DPCCH only The channel s code domain power relative to the total signal power Select the Save Table button to store the channel table The table is stored and the dialog box is closed The new channel table is included in the Predefined Tables list in the Channel Detection dialog box To activate the use of the new channel table a Select the table in the Predefined Tables list b Select the Select button A checkmark is displayed next to the selected table c Toggle the Use Predefined Channel Table setting to Predefined d Toggle the Compare Meas Signal with Predefined Table setting to On e Start anew measurement To determine the Time Alignment Error 1 Open a new channel or replace an existing one and select the 3GPP FDD appli cation From the Meas Setup menu select Synchronization Configure the location of the S CPICH for antenna 2 and select the Antenna Pattern 3 Select the Time Alignment Error measurement a From the Meas Setup menu select Select Measurement b In the Select Measurement dialog box select the Time Alignment Error but ton The Time Alignment Error is calculated and displayed immediately Measurement 1 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power 8 Measurement Examples 8 1 Some practical examples for basic 3GPP FDD Base stat
215. or missing TFCI BTS measurements only Data channel uses TFCI symbols Mapping UE measurements only Branch the channel is mapped to I or Q PilotL Bits Number of pilot bits in the channel UE measurements only for control channel DPCCH Pwr Abs dBm Pwr Rel dBm Absolute and relative channel power referred to the CPICH or the total power of the signal T Offs Chips BTS measurements only Timing offset Code Domain Power 3G FDD BTS 1 Code Domain Power Fig 3 3 Code Domain Power Display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements The Code Domain Power evaluation shows the power of all possible code channels in the selected channel slot The x axis shows the possible code channels from 0 to the highest spreading factor Due to the circumstance that the power is regulated from slot to slot the result power may differ between different slots Detected channels are dis played yellow The selected code channel is highlighted red The codes where no channel could be detected are displayed green Note Effects of missing or incomplete pilot symbols In Autosearch channel detec tion mode the application expects specific pilot symbols for DPCH channels If these User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 17 R amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display ESSEEEyEE _ AI ees symbols are missing or incomplete the channel power in the Code Domain Power evaluat
216. ote sess 185 Evaltiatilig casts eerte mtt terme petes 83 Retrieving remote 174 Trace remote 184 Trace data query remote ssssssss 178 Retrieving Calculated results remote sssssss 174 Results remote hee ete 174 Trace results remote sees 184 RF attenuation PU 59 MERIT M 59 siut S 53 FREMOLG ene E MEETS US 123 124 RF Power Trigger level remote sees 134 REO needed RRC Filter S S CPICH Antenna pattern c eet rd orent ono te dad 69 Code number Synchronization Mode irissen 69 Sample Pate sp srini EE 66 Configuring in channel table TS 17 Scaling Amplitude range automatically 61 Configuration softkey 60 YaKie dents 4 01 lee p a ae ia 36 Scraimblitig Ode cis coerente ern n inh ea REE 32 Autosearch BIS uis ife zin MAY OU e TREE Select meas iei P 46 Settings SU M Show inactive channels Signal capturing Remote CONTIG iuis cipe terr types etta 138 SORKEY aros eiin 66 Signal description BTS remote 2 5 nio beds 118 BTS Configuration 48 Configuration 48 Remote control
217. plifiier hardware option on the connected instrument Depending on the instrument in use the preamplification is defined by INPut GAIN VALue Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 60 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements INPut GAIN VALue Gain This command selects the gain level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 129 The command requires the additional preamplifier hardware option Parameters Gain 15 dB 30 dB The availability of gain levels depends on the model of the instrument in use RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 60 10 6 3 3 Configuring the Attenuation INPUEATTeOnHatiofy to ra ree an eie ai ce tate tasers tele nade abre die ce tee eee 130 INPURAT TemuationtAW Os T een 131 INP EA m enp 131 INPUCEATTAUTO ace erac cals edere ead ex aat de arce ma a a neta ta C o a d 131 INPUCEATT STAT e STE 132 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but th
218. port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 35V RST 1 4V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 64 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IF Power lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IQP 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a referenc
219. power of a channel is always measured in relation to its symbol rate or spreading factor In the 3GPP FDD applications the channel number consists of the used spreading fac tor and the channel s sequential number in the code domain assuming the code domain is divided into equal divisions sequence number gt lt spreading factor Example For a channel number of 5 32 for example imagine a code domain of 512 codes with a scale of 16 codes per division Each division represents a possible channel with spreading factor 32 Since channel numbering starts at 0 channel number 5 is the sixth division on the scale Selected codes and channels In the result displays that refer to channels the currently selected channel is highligh ted in the diagram You select a channel by entering a channel number and spreading factor in the Evaluation Range settings In the example above if you select the chan nel number 5 32 the sixth division on the scale with 16 codes per division is highligh ted For the display in the 3GPP FDD applications the scale for code based diagrams con tains 512 divisions one for each code The selected channel in the example 5 32 would thus correspond to codes 80 96 The division starts at 5 16 80 and is 16 codes wide If no spreading factor is given for the channel number the default factor 512 is assumed Channel number 5 would thus refer to the sixth division on the scale which is the sixth code
220. r 1 to 3 GHz L On YIG Preselector Radio Frequency State iere rem tpa rct dk ERE ce a a Ee ELE Ree X ERE aeg an id 54 AMSAT GING E A E E A E T EN 54 Input Coupling iid eere ct a ie en Era HEP eet eh 54 luere 54 High Pass Filter 14 9 GM cte ha fis FERE rH e Fere 54 blleonr2rro MEE 54 Code Domain Analysis Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 124 Instrument Specifies a configured instrument to be used for input Input Coupling The RF input of the instrument in use can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct current DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 123 Impedance For some measurements the reference impedance for the measured levels of the instrument in use can be set to 50 Q or 75 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Remot
221. r are expected Therefore an EVM measure ment interval of one slot minus 25 us 3904 chips is considered OFF Changes of power are not expected Therefore an EVM mea surement interval of one slot 4096 chips is considered RST OFF Example SENS CDP ETCH ON Manual operation See Eliminate Tail Chips on page 88 10 7 10 7 1 Configuring the Result Display SENSe CDPower HSLot State This command switches between the analysis of half slots and full slots Parameters State ON OFF ON 30 half slots are evaluated OFF 15 full slots are evaluated RST OFF Example SENS CDP HSL ON Mode UE application only Manual operation See Measurement Interval on page 87 Configuring the Result Display The commands required to configure the screen display in a remote environment are described here e Global Layout Comimafitls n o A A A S 163 e Working with Windows in the Display seeeemm em 167 e General Window Comtimaride 9 2 2 cdi De a EUR a EP n 173 Global Layout Commands The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the Screen layout across measurement channels as you do in manual operation For compatibility with other Rohde amp Schwarz Signal and Spectrum Analyzers the lay out commands described in chapter 10 7 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 167 are also supported Note however that the comman
222. remote eese 163 168 X X value Ecc NS 91 Y Y maximum Y minimum Scaling si 61 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating eiesinnige 54 Activating Deactivating remote 124 Z Zooming Activating remote sse Area Multiple mode remote Area remote essesssseseeeeenrenennennn Deactivatlhg isaer Multiple mode Multiple mode remote sess lcd OAOE Restoring original display Single mode Single mode remote
223. resholdLevel gt This command defines the minimum power that a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be regarded as an active channel Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive Parameters lt ThresholdLevel gt Range 100 dB to 0 dB RST 60 dB Example SENS CDP ICTR 100 Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Inactive Channel Threshold BTS measurements only on page 70 Managing Channel Tables CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle STAT 2 ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeaeaaaaeeeeenenenenes 146 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle CATalog cesses 146 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COPY 2 2 icti e rriv tea k aca dra aaraa 147 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DELete e eeeciisisssss esee e nennen nnn ann 148 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle SELect sse eren 148 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABIe STATe iint reete i REA 148 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle CATalog sse enne 149 GONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle GODBY erit eunte nont n RR RH cut nna eee R ERR eu E AREA 149 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DELete sse ener eene 149 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle SELecl terre eere erede a pav naianei ea 150 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle STATe State This command switches the channel table on or off When switched on the measured channel table is stored und
224. rnal reference frequency for frequency measurements on base stations For instance a rubidium frequency standard may be used as a ref erence source e If the base station is provided with a trigger output connect this output to the trig ger input of the analyzer Presetting Configure the R amp S VSE as follows e Set the external attenuation Reference level offset e Set the reference level e Set the center frequency e Set the trigger e Select the BTS standard and measurement 3GPP FDD UE Test Models The possible channel configurations for the mobile station signal are limited by 3GPP Only two different configurations for data channels DPDCH are permissible according to the specification In addition to these two channel configurations the HS DPCCH channel can be transmitted to operate the mobile station in HSDPA mode Thus the 3GPP FDD UE application checks for these channel configurations only during the automatic channel search Therefore channels whose parameters do not correspond to one of these configurations are not automatically detected as active channels The two possible channel configurations are summarized below Table 4 13 Channel configuration 1 DPCCH and 1 DPDCH Channel type Number of chan Symbol rate Spreading Mapping nels code s DPCCH 1 15 ksps 0 Q DPDCH 1 15 ksps 960 spreading l ksps factor 4 Setup for User Equipment Tests Table 4 14 Channel configuration
225. rror onto the class with spread ing factor 256 R amp S VSE K72 Measurement Examples 3G FDD BTS 1 Code Domain Power iClrw rc 3G FDD BTS 3 Peak Code Domain Error idrw 8 d 64 Code Code 511 3 Slot 14 Fig 8 6 Measurement Example 4 Determining the Peak Code Domain Error User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 108 Error Messages 9 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results do not meet your expectations try the following methods to optimize the measurement 9 1 Synchronization fails Check the frequency Check the reference level Check the scrambling code When using an external trigger check whether an external trigger is being sent to the instrument in use Error Messages Error messages are entered in the error event queue of the status reporting system in the remote control mode and can be queried with the command SYSTem ERRor A short explanation of the device specific error messages for the 3GPP FDD applica tions is given below Status bar message Description Sync not found This message is displayed if synchronization is not possible Possible causes are that frequency level scrambling code Invert Q values are set incorrectly or the input signal is invalid Sync OK This message is displayed if synchronization is possible Incorrect pilot symbols This message is displayed if one or more of the received pilot symbols are not equal to the specified pi
226. rrr rir rr reet kr thiet ea re E ERE EH ER eri EXTR EE PETERE TiTi 162 SENSe GDPower FIETer S TATe iier enaa nen tr Lene nte ie Pe Eod eden n ne Fu n 139 SENSe GDPower FRAMeE VAG i oe cedente d ee Pes rre a db ces Ec EN 158 SENSe CDPower HSDhParrode 12 rere tr ner Re E HER cevecsostnesncsezba EE dea pacis SENSe CDPower FISLOt 5 atre raaa uaine e e ee dyad dene SENSe CDPower ICTReshold 2 SENSe CDPower IOliengtly rone rere thinner rr ben ON ICAA ENNET VAALEAN ara EISTE SENSe CDPower ECODe DVALue nter rr etre tetti tree er E rnt i ma REX INR 121 SENSe GDPower ECOD SEARcCh bIS T2 eto ice a pecora oce bsec er Re rca eiu do LEAN Mrd 119 SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARCch IMMediate sees nnne nnnm 119 SENSe CDPower ECODe TYPE coenae terr rtt eet t Een eh er e n D P a RR EXE Dea aA 122 SENSe GBPower ECODeLPVALue s s o co tei ea hie IO on eb e Ehe erento sedi dese cep ea ea ia PEE 121 SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJust SENSe CDPower MAPPitig 2 2 ote eret e riae peek nani tena ren er ai Pe barrera eben aba Peng ee ERR epee SENSe GDPowerMIMQO aane a erts eroe tec eese ra od carey Po eie ed Or ri PLATE EA YI Dun uU NAE SENSe CDPower NORM8allze 21 rir enn hatt eer er sn rh eee Lr oa er rr EFE EE SENSe CDPower PGONItOl 2 roter th tr tr eet tener Eee en I Ernte d EE ERR e Dp ERR ERE en ah SENSe GDPower PDIET soc netos n a i decide edi Go a Es RINT A
227. rthermore a Time Alignment Error measurement is provided In addition to the code domain power measurements specified by the 3GPP standard the 3GPP FDD options offer measurements with predefined settings in the frequency domain e g RF power measurements Selecting the measurement type When you activate an 3GPP FDD application Code Domain Analysis of the input sig nal is started automatically However the 3GPP FDD applications also provide other measurement types gt To select a different measurement type do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Select Measurement button Select the required measurement e Fromthe Meas Setup menu select Select Measurement Select the required measurement s Code BDomaili Analysis eee tree teet pee etd aes leg va Bazar bed dnas 46 e Time Alignment Error Measurements sese endete 81 Code Domain Analysis 3GPP FDD measurements require a special application on the R amp S VSE General R amp S VSE functions The application independent functions for general tasks on the R amp S VSE are also available for 3GPP FDD measurements and are described in the R amp S VSE Base Soft ware User Manual In particular this comprises the following functionality Controlling Instruments and Capturing I Q Data e Data Management e General Software Preferences and Information e Configuration OVelVIGW uet ox rp eae pr Re rd EE en EH E bata gr keRE E 47 e Signal DescrplilO
228. s Other channels are optional and contain the user data to be transmitted A data chan nel is any channel that does not have a predefined channel number and symbol rate The following channel types can be detected by the 3GPP FDD UE application Table 4 7 Common 3GPP FDD UE data channels and their usage Channel type Description DPDCH The Dedicated Physical Data Channel is used to carry UPLINK data from the UE to the BS The code allocation depends on the total required symbol rate EDPDCH The Enhanced Dedicated Physical Data Channel is used to carry UPLINK data for high speed channels EDPDCH It is used in HSUPA signal setup The symbol rate and code allocation depends on the number of DPDCH and HS DPCCH 3GPP FDD BTS Test Models As specified in 3GPP the channel table can contain up to 6 DPDCHs or up to 4 E DPDCHs 0 4 4 3GPP FDD BTS Test Models For measurements on base station signals in line with 3GPP test models with different channel configurations are specified in the document Base station conformance test ing FDD 3GPP TS 25 141 V5 7 0 An overview of the test models is provided here Table 4 8 Test model 1 Channel type Number of chan Power Level dB Spreading Timing offset nels 96 code x256Tchip PCCPCH SCH 1 10 10 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 10 10 0 0 PICH 1 1 6 18 16 120 SCCPCH SF 256
229. s 2 2 2 elated 111 Coupling Input remote zi Donee unes CPIC A EE MOGE eS Power reference Slot displayed nete ec M silii M T athe D Data acquisition see Signal capturing rrt rt tme 66 Data format In 185 DC offset see IQ offset 2i crepat aa 86 88 Delta markers DefiNiNg icc et cen a she adim nected 91 Diagram footer information iana anasan nnn 10 Diagrams Footer information kiiun 10 Dl M 37 E Electronic input attenuation eesesesese 59 Eliminating IQ offset Tail chips Errors golpe aak 58 Evaluation methods Ie 163 168 Evaluation range Branch 84 85 SIM 83 Remote control 158 SENDIS dasa TEE 83 n 84 ec 83 Evaluations Bitstream 07 CDA 14 TA n 30 EVM Symbol pere racedeen te marlaevalonteady 13 EVM vs Chip Eval atlon iori ect e ee des teilen ea 20 Tirace results 2 etti ime tdem tese 183 Exporting Scrambling Codes uiri ti intres Eb o nde 51 External trigger Level remote F Filters High pass remote ertet etta 123 Higb pass RF Input 2 2 iet ee tees 54 YIG remote 2i tete pii termed hme 124 Format Data remote Scrambling
230. s Ql NIELSEN 220 Marker 221 Overview as 219 ZOOM M 221 Traces Configuration remote esee 192 Configuration softkey arenira a 88 M de chs M M Mode remote m Results remote notet reete Trigger Configuration remote esses 132 External remote m Measurement example 5 neenon nen 102 Offset Output Programming example orcinec 212 SIOPC ep S 65 135 oM E pM 12 Trigger level asec cteviceees 64 External trigger remote 134 VQ POWE remote 2 i ttm ERES 134 IF Power remote ce cient een 134 RF Power remote i aceite needs 134 Trigger source Ae External ts EGG RUN deriye iranti at dee Trigger Gate Configuration Softkey cime 63 Type Scrambling codes UE b i itid 52 U UE User equipment x manie peret 7 Units Reference level xassis msgiassiiurseni nuanian Upper Level Hysteresis Use TFCI Channeltable te iir Does De tace tweets 75 Ww WCDMA P 7 Window title bar information esseeseees 10 Windows Adding remote sssri ert pti 163 168 Closing remote 166 171 172 COMMQUMING coiere eb eve edidere tp ele eae rebas kus 48 Querying remote 165 166 170 Replacing remote sssssssssss 167 171 Types
231. s are determined and displayed in the Result Summary global results and channel results for the selected channel The number of the CPICH slot at which the measurement is performed is indicated globally for the measurement in the channel bar The spreading code of the selected channel is indicated with the channel number in the channel bar and above the channel specific results in the Result Summary In the Channel Table the analysis results for all active channels are displayed Table 3 1 General code domain power results for a specific frame and slot Parameter Description Total Power The total signal power average power of total evaluated slot Carrier Freq Error The frequency error relative to the center frequency of the analyzer The absolute frequency error is the sum of the analyzer and DUT frequency error The specified value is averaged for one CPICH slot See also the note on Carrier Frequency Error on page 13 Chip Rate Error The chip rate error in the frame to analyze in ppm As a result of a high chip rate error symbol errors arise and the CDP measurement is possibly not synchronized to the 3GPP FDD BTS signal The result is valid even if synchronization of the ana lyzer and signal failed User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 12 R amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display Parameter Description Trigger to Frame The time difference between the beginning of the recorded signa
232. s configured ER S Add Window Inserts a new result display window for the selected measurement channel Control toolbar For a description of these functions see the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual Table 1 6 Functions in the Control toolbar Icon Description Selects the currently active channel IQ Analyzer 7 gt Capture performs the selected measurement lI Pause temporarily stops the current measurement Reference of Toolbar Functions Icon Description e Continuous toggles to continuous measurement mode for next capture gt Single toggles to single measurement mode for next capture e Record performs the selected measurement and records the captured data and results Refresh Repeats the evaluation of the data currently in the capture buffer without Y capturing new data VSA application only Help toolbar For a description of these functions see the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual Table 1 7 Functions in the Help toolbar Icon Description R 2 Help Select allows you to select an object for which context specific help is displayed not available in standard Windows dialog boxes or measurement result windows P Help displays context sensitive help topic for currently selected element Application specific toolbars The following toolbars are application specific not all functions shown here may be available in each
233. s or displays the Instrument tool window Preset gt Restores stored settings gt All Restores the default software configuration globally for the entire software gt All amp Delete Instru Restores the default software configuration globally for the entire ments software and deletes all instrument configurations gt Selected Channel Restores the default software configuration for an individual channel gt Reset VSE Layout Restores the default layout of windows toolbars etc in the R amp S VSE software Preferences gt Configures global software settings gt General gt Displayed Items Hides or shows individual screen elements gt Theme amp Color Configures the style of individual screen elements gt Network amp Remote Configures the network settings and remote access to or from other devices gt Recording Configures general recording parameters Print Opens Print dialog to print selected measurement results Exit Closes the R amp S VSE software A 1 1 2 Window Menu The Window menu allows you to hide or show individual windows Menu item Correspond Description ing icon in toolbar Player Displays the Player tool window to recall I Q data recordings Instrument Setup Displays the Instruments window to configure input instruments A 1 1 3 A 1 2 Menu Reference Menu item Correspond ing icon in toolbar Description M
234. s the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division For example 10 dB in the Code Domain Power result display DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant With a reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 58 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 58 INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the preamplifier on the instrument in use on and off It requires the additional pream
235. s whether the slot format and data rate are determined by the Transport For mat Combination Indicator TFCl Remote command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 152 Timing Offset Defines a timing offset in relation to the CPICH channel During evaluation the detec ted timing offset can be compared to this setting only the delta is displayed see Tim ing Offset Reference on page 71 Remote command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 152 Pilot Bits Number of pilot bits of the channel only valid for the control channel DPCCH Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 152 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 153 CDP Relative Code domain power relative to the total power of the signal Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 152 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 153 Code Domain Analysis Status Indicates the channel status Codes that are not assigned are marked as inactive channels Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 152 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 153 Conflict Indicates a code domain conflict between channel definitions e g overlapping chan nels 5 1 8 5 Channel Details UE Measurements Channel details are configured in the Channel Table dialog box which is displayed when you sele
236. settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the Screen Specifics for 1 Code Domain Power 7 In CDA evaluations only one trace can be active in each diagram at any time Markers Window specific configuration The settings in this dialog box are specific to the selected window To configure the settings for a different window select the window outside the displayed dialog box or select the window from the Specifics for selection list in the dialog box Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each measurement This is the default setting Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several measurements and displayed The R amp S VSE saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S VSE saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Average The average is formed over several measurements View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 192 6 5 Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract n
237. signal The time reference for the start of slot 0 is the start of a 3GPP radio frame Halfslot The length of each analysis interval is reduced to 1280 chips corre sponding to half of one time slot of the 3GPP signal Remote command SENSe CDPower HSLot on page 163 6 4 Traces Compensate IQ Offset If enabled the I Q offset is eliminated from the measured signal This is useful to deduct a DC offset to the baseband caused by the DUT thus improving the EVM Note however that for EVM measurements according to standard compensation must be disabled Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 160 Eliminate Tail Chips Selects the length of the measurement interval for calculation of error vector magnitude EVM in accordance with 3GPP specification Release 5 On Changes of power are expected Therefore an EVM measurement interval of one slot minus 25 us at each end of the burst 3904 chips is considered Off Changes of power are not expected Therefore an EVM measure ment interval of one slot 4096 chips is considered Default settings Remote command SENSe CDPower ETCHips on page 162 Code Power Display For Code Domain Power evaluation Defines whether the absolute power or the power relative to the total signal is dis played Absolute Absolute power levels Relative Relative to the total signal power Remote command SENSe CDPower PDISplay on page 161 Traces The trace
238. signal level without overloading the R amp S VSE or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Note that this command is retained for compatibility reasons only For new R amp S VSE programs use SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 158 SENSe CDPower PRESet This command resets the 3GPP FDD channel to its predefined settings Any RF mea surement is aborted and the measurement type is reset to Code Domain Analysis Note that this command is retained for compatibility reasons only For new R amp S VSE programs use SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 117 Usage Event Commands for Compatibility SENSe CDPower UCPich CODE lt CodeNumber gt This command sets the code number of the user defined CPICH used for signal analy sis This command only applies to antenna 1 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use SENSe CDPower U CPich ANT antenna CODE on page 141 for new remote control pro grams Parameters lt CodeNumber gt Range 0 to 225 RST 0 Example SENS CDP UCP CODE 10 Mode BTS application only SENSe CDPower UCPich PATTern lt Pattern gt This command defines which pattern is used for signal analysis for the user defined CPICH see SENSe CDPower UCPich STATe on page 208 This command only applies to antenna 1 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT ante
239. sitioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta markers on the trace CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtION CPICH cccccssecceescceceeseceesseeceeneceseeeeseaaes 199 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PCCPCH cccccsececesseecenceeceeneceeseeeceaeeees 200 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXiIMUM LEFT ccc0scccceesccesseseceeeececeeseeeaaeeeseaeeees 200 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXiIMUM NEXT ccccceccceceseecessseecececeseseecsseseeeaeees 200 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK cessisse nennen 200 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXiIMUM RIGHL cccecescecesseeesenceeecaseeceeeeeeseneeeaas 200 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINiIMUM LEFT cccccsssccceccceseeceseesseeceacceeeeseeeeeees 200 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINiIMUM NEXT c 00cccccescecceescceceeseceessceeeescesseeeeeeanes 201 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eee nnne 201 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINiIMUM RIGHL ccccccccceesceeeseseeeesececeenceeseeseeeeneees 201 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion CPICh This command sets the delta marker to channel 0 This command is only available in Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power evaluations Analysis Example CALC DELT2 FUNC CPIC CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PCCPch
240. so as a reference in 3GPP FDD signal measurements The user data is contained in the Dedicated Physical Channel DPCH More details on channel types are provided in chapter 4 2 BTS Channel Types on page 35 Chips frames and slots The user data is spread across the available bandwidth using the spreading factor before transmission The spreaded bits are referred to as chips A time span of 10 ms is also known as a frame A frame is a basic time unit in the transmission process Each frame is divided into 15 time slots Various channel parameters are put in relation to frames or the individual slots in the 3GPP standard as well as some measurement results for 3GPP FDD signals A slot contains 2560 chips Channel slots versus CPICH slots The time slots of the individual channels may not be absolutely synchronous A time offset may occur so that the slots in a data channel are slightly shifted in relation to the CPICH slots for example In the 3GPP FDD BTS application the CPICH slot number is provided as a reference with the measurement settings in the channel bar In the Result Summary the actual slot number of the evaluated channel is indicated as the Channel Slot No Pilot symbols Some slots contain a fixed sequence of symbols referred to as pilot symbols These pilot symbols allow the receiver to identify a particular channel if the unique pilot sym bols can be detected in the input signal User Manual 1176 89
241. sssesssssuvessssneesssssuessssuvessesuetsesseees 126 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO ccssssssssssssssesssssssesssssvesssssssssssivessssuvesssssusssssieessasivessssieesssssees 126 SENSE FRE QUENC VOFF SOL season ate ue rre er gera Perge a nen US Exec er cU Y se pH eR eu EUR QURE RE UO ATEA 127 SENS6 SWEGp G OU NE iiic eerte ete adeptum ache nter Geel tpe creen need 140 CAL Culate MARKe rsm EUNGOniZOQOM n aerei toten crie Ete rire e cur EE EC du 160 CAL Culatespn z GDPowWerMappliigie sorore nae tpe aret etat S ATEENAN ERES E REEE Ee RUE LE 159 CALGCulate sn DELTamarker stm AQFEF ch LE eroe regt er e dee tco a tes 195 CGALCulate n DELTamarkersm FUNCtion CPICh otto reete ierit sieeve neni 199 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PCCPCh sesssssssssssssseeseeee nennen enne nennt nnne 200 CALCulate lt n gt DEL T marker mo MAXimuim LEEF T ntpote ticae ce t etg tue te tna CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHL ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeseeeeeseseeeeeeneeeseneee 200 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimumf PEAK essent nennen nennen 200 CALCulatesn gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt MINIMUMILEFP T iioc oa recette aun ce ierat tnb e ex iran 200 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT sssssssssssesseeseeeneee enne nnn enhn nnn nntn inn rntn nena 2
242. surement The channel table can contain a maximum of 512 entries In BTS measurements this corresponds to the 512 codes that can be assigned within the class of spreading factor 512 In UE measurements this corresponds to the 256 codes that can be assigned within the class of spreading factor 256 with both and Q branches The first entries of the table indicate the channels that must be available in the signal to be analyzed and any other control channels see chapter 4 2 BTS Channel Types on page 35 and chapter 4 3 UE Channel Types on page 39 The lower part of the table indicates the data channels that are contained in the signal User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 15 R amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display If the type of a channel can be fully recognized based on pilot sequences or modula tion type the type is indicated in the table In BTS measurements all other channels are of type CHAN The channels are in descending order according to symbol rates and within a symbol rate in ascending order according to the channel numbers Therefore the unassigned codes are always displayed at the end of the table 3G FDD BTS 2 Channel Table e 1 clrw PwrAbs PwrRel Mod SymRate Toffs PilotL Chan Type dBm dB Type ksps Chips Bits NONE a ONE U 5 Fig 3 2 Channel Table display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CTABle see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 168 TRACe l
243. sweeps Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the results e g when comparing errors or peaks 12 In the Control toolbar or in the Sequence tool window select gt Single cap ture mode then select the Capture function to stop the continuous measure ment mode and start a defined number of measurements To define or edit a channel table Channel tables contain a list of channels to be detected and their specific parameters You can create user defined and edit pre defined channel tables 1 2 From the Meas Setup menu select Channel Detection To define a new channel table select the New button next to the Predefined Tables list To edit an existing channel table a Select the existing channel table in the Predefined Tables list b Select the Edit button next to the Predefined Tables list In the Channel Table dialog box define a name and optionally a comment that describes the channel table The comment is displayed when you set the focus on the table in the Predefined Tables list Define the channels to be detected using one of the following methods Select the Measure Table button to create a table that consists of the channels detected in the currently measured signal Or a Select the Add Channel button to insert a row for a new channel below the currently selected row in the channel table b Define the channel specifications required f
244. t Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 59 INPut EATT AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 59 10 6 4 10 6 4 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 59 Configuring Triggered Measurements The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described inchapter 5 1 5 Trigger Settings on page 63 Note that the availability of trigger settings depends on the instrument in use The OPC command should be used after commands that retrieve da
245. t Branch for a Window on page 85 Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS Measurements Some evaluations provide further settings for the results The commands for BTS mea surements are described here CAL CulatesMARKer lt m FUNCHON ZOOM rra rre dtc ttr ctt es epe zad ce teda 160 SENSeJCDPONWGEOPDB rite RUDI IRR RPR ERI RR A EEEE SNR A EM d MURS 160 SENSe CDPower NORMalize ee scies eene eene nhanh nnn annt nan shas nean shines Loa 160 SENSeTCDPOWeRPDISplIBV i225 iret rta dentato are ere e etd qu xe tet eec za expe aid 161 SENSe COPoWerPDIFH E 161 SENSe JCD Power PREFCRERCE 6 o orna s cei ru tentant ere ere ER Rs cu XR ERR Feb n Es Dae End duae 161 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ZOOM State If marker zoom is activated the number of channels displayed on the screen in the code domain power and code domain error power result diagram is reduced to 64 The currently selected marker defines the center of the displayed range Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC ZOOM ON SENSe CDPower CPB lt Value gt This command selects the constellation parameter B According to 3GPP specification the mapping of 16QAM symbols to an assigned bit pattern depends on the constella tion parameter B Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 Example SENS CDP CDP 1 Manual operation See Constellation Parameter B on page 87
246. t n gt DATA CTABle TRACe lt n gt DATA PWCDp TRACe lt n gt DATA CWCDp Table Configuration Channel Table You can configure which parameters are displayed in the Channel Table by clicking not double clicking a column header A Table Configuration dialog box is displayed in which you can select the columns to be displayed Displayed Columns Channel Type iV Modulation 4 Ch SF V Symbol Rate 4 Power dBm V Timing Offset Power dB v TFCI 4 State v PilotL Show Inactive Channels By default only active channels are displayed In order to display all channels includ ing the inactive ones enable the Show Inactive Channels option The following parameters of the detected channels are determined by the CDP mea surement and can be displayed in the Channel Table evaluation For details see chap ter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 12 User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 16 R amp S VSE K72 Measurements and Result Display Table 3 4 Code domain power results in the channel table Label Description Chan Type Type of channel active channels only Ch SF Number of channel spreading code 0 to spreading factor 1 Symbol Rate ksps Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted In BTS measurements always State Active channel is active and all pilot symbols are correct Inactive channel is not active Pilotf channel is active but pilot symbols incomplete
247. t n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaaaaaaaeeneneteneneees 198 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimUM RIGHL cccccceececessseeceeceeeceaceeessseeceeeeeeeneeeees 198 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUM ILEFT 0cccccseeeceesceeceescceaeeseceeeeceseegcceaseeeseaeees 198 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUM NEXT cccccescccceecececesceceeeseeceaecsesseessaeeeeeeeees 199 CALCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK cecinere nennen 199 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUM RIGHLL ccccccccceeccceceseeceseeeeceeeeeeceseeceeeeeesageeeaes 199 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CPICh This command sets the marker to channel 0 This command is only available in Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power evaluations Example CALC MARK FUNC CPIC Analysis Manual operation See Marker To CPICH on page 94 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PCCPch This command sets the marker to the position of the PCCPCH This command is only available in code domain power and code domain error power evaluations Example CALC MARK FUNC PCCP Manual operation See Marker To PCCPCH on page 94 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate
248. t unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 80 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 80 See Restore Original Display on page 80 See R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 81 Querying the Status Registers The following commands are required for the status reporting system specific to the 3GPP FDD applications In addition the 3GPP FDD applications also use the standard status registers of the R amp S VSE depending on the measurement type For details on the common R amp S VSE status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S VSE User Manual RST does not influence the status registers The STATus QUEStionable SYNC register contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during pilot symbol detection Querying the Status Registers Table 10 9 Status error bits in STATus QUEStionable SYNC register for 3GPP FDD applications Bit Definition 0 Not used 1 Frame Sync failed This bit is set when synchronization is not possible within the application Possible reasons Incorrectly set frequency Incorrectly s
249. ta so that subse quent commands to change the selected trigger source are held off until after the sweep is completed and the data has been returned e Configuring the Triggering CONditiOnS eee eeenneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeneaaas 132 e Configuring the Tigger OUMPUt imatran a aa advent 136 Configuring the Triggering Conditions The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement Note that the availability of trigger sources depends on the instrument in use TRIGOSI S EQuence DTIME S 133 TRIGger SEQuence HOLBoff TIME 2 2 2 oorr cetur ccrta ee eroe erede 133 TRIGSer SEQuence PPowerblObDDolf taire rn ETE 133 TRIGger SEQuence IF Power HYS Terbsis 1 toot tero rete tati e cbe eo dta ede 133 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port ccce 134 TRIGSer SEQuence Vell POWE r conica iot rr toe tex Eau x R TE ael 134 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPOWEM cccceececee cece cee ae eee eee eae ceeceteteeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaea 134 TRiGger SEQuence EEVelREPQWEE ted eteacer rta gas intret ea lo ted deo d ins 134 TRIGger SEQuenoce SLOPBe oer rase c cc a zum en en us eat ee Ra YER YA Ra d BRA YRAD IUE 135 TWRiGger SEQuence SOU RCC css i iari xr n an rotta E OR ERR HRRERR A 135 TRIGSer SEQuencel ME RINTEN 2 eiu nein ette eee ee e ru bna 136 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt
250. te that the window type must be valid for the active measure ment channel To create a window for a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal REPLace WINDow com mand Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY ADD 1 BEL XPOW CDP ABSolute Adds a Code Domain Power display below window 1 Usage Query only Configuring the Result Display Manual operation See Bitstream on page 15 See Channel Table on page 15 See Code Domain Power on page 17 See Code Domain Error Power on page 18 See Composite Constellation on page 18 See Composite EVM on page 19 See EVM vs Chip on page 20 See Frequency Error vs Slot on page 21 See Mag Error vs Chip on page 22 See Marker Table on page 22 See Peak Code Domain Error on page 23 See Phase Discontinuity vs Slot on page 24 See Phase Error vs Chip on page 24 See Power vs Slot on page 26 See Power vs Symbol on page 26 See Result Summary on page 27 See Symbol Constellation on page 27 See Symbol EVM on page 28 See Symbol Magnitude Error on page 29 See Symbol Phase Error on page 29 Table 10 6 lt WindowType gt parameter values for 3GPP FDD application Parameter value Window type BITStream Bitstream CCONst Composite Constellation CDPower Code Domain Power CDEPower Code Do
251. ted by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 138 5 1 6 Signal Capture Data Acquisition How much and how data is captured from the input signal are defined in the Signal Capture settings Common Settings Sample Rate Swap VQ RRC Filter Frame Slot Capture Settings Capture Mode Slot Frame Capture Length Frames 1 Frame to Analyze J Capture Time Sample RAG etae a E S EEE A EAE a 66 Dno M 67 RRO Fill r Stag i e tnt ert ce cot d d ce tunc dt e e e 67 Capture orci Et 67 Capture Length Frames iinei Itera Ease nx ko tatur tape ae ax Ranae ende 67 Frame Po ANAZO oiii hber pecie pneu ee ae iue Epp E ree ARENAER ESSEEN 67 Capes TINO C E 67 Capture Average COUDL enis te ipei tree nn ENERE EEEREN 67 Sample Rate The sample rate is always 16 MHz indicated for reference only Code Domain Analysis Invert Q Inverts the sign of the signal s Q branch The default setting is OFF Remote command SENSe CDPower QINVert on page 140 RRC Filter State Selects if a root raised cosine RRC receiver filter is used or not This feature is useful if the RRC filter is implemented in the device under test DUT ON If an unfiltered signal is received normal case the RRC filter should be used to get a correct signal demodulation Default settings OFF If a filtered signal is received the RRC filter should not be used to get a correct si
252. tenuation Time Alignment Error Measurements The following values are recommended for the external attenuator to ensure that the RF input of the analyzer is protected and the sensitivity of the analyzer is not reduced too much Max power Recommended ext attenuation 355 to 60 dBm 35 to 40 dB 350 to 55 dBm 30 to 35 dB 345 to 50 dBm 25 to 30 dB 340 to 45 dBm 20 to 25 dB 335 to 40 dBm 15 to 20 dB 330 to 35 dBm 10 to 15 dB 325 to 30 dBm 5 to 10 dB 320 to 25 dBm 0 to 5 dB 20 dBm 0 dB For signal measurements at the output of two port networks connect the reference frequency of the signal source to the external reference input connector of the ana lyzer REF INPUT To ensure that the error limits specified by the 3GPP standard are met the ana lyzer should use an external reference frequency for frequency measurements on user equipment For instance a rubidium frequency standard may be used as a reference source If the user equipment is provided with a trigger output connect this output to one of the TRIGGER INPUT connectors of the analyzer Presetting Configure the R amp S VSE as follows Set the external attenuation Reference level offset Set the reference level Set the center frequency Set the trigger Select the UE standard and measurement 4 8 Time Alignment Error Measurements Time Alignment Error Measurements are a special type of Code Domain Analysis used to
253. ter specifies the required evaluation method ACHannels Number of active channels CDPabsolute code domain power absolute CDPRelative code domain power relative CERRor chip rate error CHANnel channel number CMAPping Channel branch CSLot channel slot number EVMPeak error vector magnitude peak EVMRms error vector magnitude RMS FERRor frequency error in Hz IQIMbalance 1 Q imbalance IQOFfset 1 Q offset MACCuracy composite EVM MPIC average power of the inactive codes for the selected slot MTYPe modulation type BPSK I 0 BPSK Q 1 4PAM I 6 4PAM Q 7 NONE 15 PCDerror peak code domain error PSYMbol Number of pilot bits PTOTal total power RHO Retrieving Results rho value for every slot SRATe symbol rate TFRame trigger to frame TOFFset timing offset Example CALC MARK FUNC WCDP MS RES PTOT Usage Query only Mode UE application only Manual operation See Code Domain Power on page 17 10 8 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt The evaluation method selected by the LAY ADD WIND command also affects the results of the trace data query TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt see TRACecn DATA on page 185 Details on the returned trace data depending on the evaluation method are provided here For details on the graphical results of these evaluation methods see chapter 3 Mea surements and Result Display on page 11 Code Domain POWO nesrin aaa ER
254. the 3GPP FDD appli cation 2 Select the Meas Setup Overview menu item to display the Overview for a 3GPP FDD measurement 3 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected input signal and used scrambling code 4 Selectthe Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 5 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted 6 Select the Signal Capture button and define the acquisition parameters for the input signal 7 f necessary select the Synchronization button and change the channel synchro nization settings 8 Select the Channel Detection button and define how the individual channels are detected within the input signal If necessary define a channel table as described in To define or edit a channel table on page 96 9 Select the 6 7 Add Window icon from the toolbar to add further result displays for the 3GPP FDD channel 10 Select Meas Setup gt Overview to display the Overview 11 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to configure how the data is evalu ated in the individual result displays Select the channel slot or frame to be evaluated Configure specific settings for the selected evaluation method s Optionally configure the trace to display the average over a series of
255. the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Automatic Measurement Time Mode and Value on page 79 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S VSE performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S VSE determines the length of the measurement Parameters Mode AUTO The R amp S VSE determines the measurement length automati cally according to the current input data MANual The R amp S VSE uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 156 RST AUTO Manual operation See Automatic Measurement Time Mode and Value on page 79 SENSe JADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold Parameters lt Threshold gt Range 0 dB to 200 dB RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 80 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold Parameters Threshold Range O dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm
256. these channels is received at code class 8 and code number 3 it is displayed as the SCCPCH CPICH Common Pilot Channel The Common Pilot Channel is used to synchronize the signal in the case of CPICH synchronization It is expected at code class 8 and code number 0 If itis not contained in the signal configuration the firmware application must be configured to sychronize to the SCH channel see Synchronization Type on page 68 Other channels are optional and contain the user data to be transmitted A data chan nel is any channel that does not have a predefined channel number and symbol rate The following channel types can be detected by the 3GPP FDD BTS application R amp SSVSE K72 Measurement Basics I U M M e Table 4 3 Common 3GPP FDD BTS data channels and their usage Channel type Description PICH Paging Indication Channel The Paging Indication Channel is expected at code class 8 and code number 16 The lower part of the table indicates the data channels contained in the signal A data channel is any channel that does not have a predefined channel number and symbol rate There are different types of data channels which are indicated in the column Chan Type DPCH Dedicated Physical Channel of a standard frame The Dedicated Physical Channel is a data channel that contains pilot symbols The displayed channel type is DPCH CPRSD Dedicated Physical Channel
257. tting Star ted manual RFPower First intermediate frequency Frequency and time domain measurements only IFPower Second intermediate frequency For frequency and time domain measurements only MAGNitude For offline input from a file rather than an instrument Triggers on a specified signal level RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 64 See Free Run on page 64 See External Trigger lt X gt on page 64 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval lt Interval gt This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger Parameters Interval 2 0 ms to 5000 Range 2ms to 5000 s RST 1 0s Example TRIG SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering TRIG TIME RINT 50 The measurement starts every 50 s 10 6 4 2 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the instrument in use Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements ODTPuttRIGSersponb s DIRBPIOD urne terrena rema ctetu e eoe tetto ade tea dads 137 OUTPuETRIGSersport LBVel neces eorr een Y Rat YR OD nn ey ERE RS ey RR EFC Ex RR RR ES ARAERRRR 137 OUTPut TRIGger port OTYPe eeeeeeeeseeseeese nennen nnns nasa ssa senda sans asas es ask sana aas dan 137 OUDTPut T
258. ttings UE Measurements Constellation Parameter B For Bitstream evaluation Defines the constellation parameter B According to 3GPP specification the mapping of 16QAM symbols to an assigned bitstream depends on the constellation parameter B This parameter can be adjusted to decide which bit mapping should be used for bit stream evaluation Remote command SENSe CDPower CPB on page 160 Code Domain Analysis Settings UE Measurements Some evaluations provide further settings for the results The settings for UE measure ments are described here Code Domain Analyzer Common Compensate IQ Offset On Eliminate Tail Chips On Measurement Interval Halfslot Code Domain Power Code Power Display Absolute MENITEE Measurement Interval iore iterat to rure cet eoe ora Pede pev be rv oae t 87 Compensate IQ Offset ssssssssssssssssssss sentent nennen nnns entrent sss nnn nnn 88 Eliminate Tall GS concetto cedar be oni eco Ee ceder ir d ed te daten 88 reor M 88 Measurement Interval Switches between the analysis of a half slot or a full slot Both measurement intervals are influenced by the settings of Eliminate Tail Chips If Eliminate Tail Chips is set to On 96 chips at both ends of the measurement interval are not taken into account for analysis Slot The length of each analysis interval is 2560 chips corresponding to one time slot of the 3GPP
259. uence LEVel IQPOWer cient tratte rre trt ir ren ER HR P teo gs 134 TRIGger SEQuericeL HH EVeL REPOWSFE outta intrant EEEE E AAEE EPEE EEEE OTE 134 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernalsports rotten tn ttr trn err rennen 134 TRIGger SEQuence SLEOPBe rrr hen mem e ione na E re PREX PEANT EE FIRES TRIGger SEQuence SOURce TRIGger SEQ uerice TIME RINT rVal certet rect erre ettet eene teet ttem 136 Index Symbols 3GPP FDD BASICS M Measurement examples Measurements ioiii nininini x eR eer Programming examples a Remote COMING sisri aaia A ACIDE Couplirig 3 5 dtr sir anton recs 54 Activating 3GPP FDD measurements remote 116 Amplitude CONMMQUPATION RD Configuration remote Iu m Analysis BTS Code Domain Settings 85 87 OTO CI E E A E A 67 REMOS CONTO uus oir Ieri ei ea aa 192 Iu S TE T EN 83 Antenna IDiVersity serii inpassen tr racer rens 50 Number Syrichronlzatiom cea coercere tni rene rna 68 ATLOMUALION zie eee iaaa aroen EASAN eau 59 Auto E Configuration remote esee 130 Displayed sicr ieissar rere ien tc 9 Electronic OPTION Ree T 59 AUTO lll T 78 Auto level Hysteresis 1 eterne mre veces Reference level ve Auto Scalilig e rrr eee rs 61 Auto scrambling code Il
260. ular values in the diagram In 3GPP FDD applications only 4 markers per window can be config ured for Code Domain Analysis e Individual Marker Settings nnne 193 e General Marker SettihtS cori e t e etr e ie i edi uda 197 e Positioning the Marker ceirnin e aA A SES PEERL Ioa dpa Yuan 197 Individual Marker Settings CAL Gulate lt n MARKer lt im gt tAQFP ii iiem tiec a pem yas ccu s ea 2I RP EE 22 SO P RUP RP To NEA 193 CALOCulate n MARKer m STATe ana ener nnne rrr tenere 194 CAL Culate lt n gt MARKEr lt m gt X cccccccccesseeceecceceeseceesseeceasececeegeceseeeeceaaeceseceseeseeeeeeeeeeaes 194 CAL Culatespi gt MARKE MA Y 0 itai docti ette ed deu abd esed ese ended edd NR RAP 194 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe eeeseeisieisesiee sesenta natas anarai 195 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF cccccssscecescececsceessescesesseeseaeeeseeseeeeaeceeeseeeaaes 195 CAL Culatesms DEL Tamat ker aM X eona on anarai naa AR a aaa aa d 195 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELAtive cccccccescceessceceescceseeeeceassceseaceeseeeeeeeaees 196 GALGulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt y 22 ccscesscesecectesacccncattccscascaeeaccnscuasccseendensecacaceaaaans 196 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Analysis Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manu
261. umeric values from a graphical display Markers are configured in the Marker dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab Select the Marker Config icon from the toolbar From the Marker menu select Marker Markers in Code Domain Analysis measurements In Code Domain Analysis measurements the markers are set to individual symbols codes slots or channels depending on the result display Thus you can use the mark ers to identify individual codes for example e dividual Marker Settings onere cert eec ted tp eit e ek EE e ea 90 e General Marker Settlhgs rS ER EORR ete desea ents 92 e Marker Search Settings ssssssssssssssssseeee eene 92 e Marker Positioning FUNCIONS ioco cetero tege tree zcu ke Eee eo err i Ec Ead Ec 93 Markers 6 5 1 Individual Marker Settings In CDA evaluations up to 4 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time Specifics for 1 Code Domain Power 3 g Place New Markierte tenaces diaii tad pana d c aed 90 M Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 4 csse 90 Selected Markef u coca ittu ste tator rr een i ete ber Feder dtu do f bap rb De r e evi 91 Marker State iiu retire t pr e ed n et reto d oe sre vete e ot en det d c 91 v vsu ct 91 MAKO TY GE a TL m M S 91 AMT MaPKGIS OM iaaa aaa
262. urement Retrieving Results Query parameters Measurement The parameter specifies the required evaluation method ACHannels Number of active channels ARCDerror relative code domain error averaged over all channels with mod ulation type 64QAM CDPabsolute code domain power absolute CDPRelative code domain power relative CERRor chip rate error CHANnel channel number CSLot channel slot number EVMPeak error vector magnitude peak EVMRms error vector magnitude RMS FERRor frequency error in Hz IOFFset imaginary part of the I Q offset IQIMbalance 1 Q imbalance IQOFfset 1 Q offset MACCuracy composite EVM MPIC average power of inactive channels MTYPe modulation type 2 QPSK 4 16 QAM 5 64 QAM 15 NONE PCDerror peak code domain error PSYMbol number of pilot bits PTOTal Retrieving Results total power QOFFset real part of the I Q offset RCDerror relative code domain error RHO rho value for every slot SRATe symbol rate TFRame trigger to frame TOFFset timing offset Example CALC MARK FUNC WCDP RES PTOT Usage Query only Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Code Domain Power on page 17 See Result Summary on page 27 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower MS RESult Measurement This command queries the measured and calculated results of the 3GPP FDD UE code domain power measurement Retrieving Results Query parameters Measurement The parame
263. urement as the average square deviation of the total signal An ideal reference signal is generated from the demodulated data The test signal and the reference signal are compared with each other The square deviation yields the composite EVM mum PE I E AN UU User Manual 1176 8968 02 01 104 Measurement 3 Measuring the Composite EVM Test setup 1 Connect the RF A output of the R amp S SMW200A to the input of the R amp S FSW 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference input REF OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S SMW200A coaxial cable with BNC connectors 3 Connect the external trigger input of the R amp S FSW TRIGGER INPUT to the exter nal trigger output USER 1 of the R amp S SMW200A Settings on the R amp S SMW200A 1 PRESET Freq A 2 1175 GHz Level 0 dBm Baseband A gt CDMA Standards gt 3GPP FDD General tab Link Direction gt DOWN FORWARD Basestations tab Test Setups Models gt Test Model 1 16 channels Basestations tab Select Basestation BS 1 ON General tab 3GPP FDD gt STATE gt ON oO oN oo B o mw RF A On Settings in the R amp S VSE File gt Preset gt All Measurement Group Setup Replace Channel gt 3GPP FDD BTS Input and Output gt Amplitude Reference level 10 dBm Input and Output gt Frequency Center frequency 2 1175 GHz Meas Setup gt Scrambling Code 0000
264. ute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is O Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 127 5 1 5 Trigger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Trigger settings can be configured in the Trigger and Gate dialog box which is dis played when you do one of the following e Select the Trigger button in the Overview From the Input amp Output menu select Trigger Trigger Source Ext Trigger 1 et Trigger Level 14V Trigger Offset 00s Siope GET Falling External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S VSE are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger Source Trigger 2 Input onoma Output Type User Defined Level Brion Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger SL Trigger 3 Janina Output Code Domain Analysis TAG GY S ONE csset tee lo eed oe men tr e teo ed d e E NK PUDE RR tute 64 EE SUFE MENDES PITE 64 iz 1 MOMENT CPC 64 E tena Moger K seed osi co EA obedire ods Sane 64 T 45 siiinicccsassrsiseseicuvsiesascesasdnaracdapainbencussssanisesdsinssacupainbeadanisecsenuinees 64 BEI gU PNE NEUE 64 c oos C P 65 TAGGET
265. utoSet toolbar Icon Description AUTO LEVEL Auto level AUTO FREQ Auto frequency Auto trigger R amp S VSE GSM application only Auto frame R amp S VSE GSM application only Auto search R amp S VSE 3GPP FDD application only Reference of Toolbar Functions Icon Description Auto scale R amp S VSE 3GPP FDD Pulse applications only Auto scale all R amp S VSE 3GPP FDD Pulse applications only Auto all ALL Configure auto settings List of Remote Commands 3GPP FDD SENSE S PHFE ig i 156 SENSe AD3Just CONFigure DU RGlIOn iic a a Pose cr Uk se E 156 SENSe JADJust CONFigure DURation MODE 5 2 non erii titt rn th hne SETAT keel 157 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYS Teresis LOWer ooo nere rtr ennt rn dt ah rh een Eno 157 SENSe JADJust CONFigure H YS Teresis UPBer cire etri rep e ee E ERE Rees ERR Lo CERE EROR 157 SENSe ADJust LEVel SENSe JAVERage lt n gt COUNE oi cscs ceteri gent reet Hp eec he YE red E exp oo eR EXER Fees ED Fee auus 140 SENSe GDPowerANTenna i or pot ur reto e E ele 118 SENSe CDPowWSer BASE ntt rrr ne niet rri re RR EO PONINA KAATE EASON EF ERN XE EE reds 139 SENSe CDPower CODE rtt rtt ee Pn eet tre e ee Era ID ERR E EYE Ted a RARE ated 158 SENSe CDPoWSFIGPB tite eee eese per i etn vaca ates Dv Fire E TREE EO E n RETE P PIE ToU 160 SENSe CDPower ETOHIDS
266. vod 130 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again for all traces t is irrelevant Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Auto Scale Once on page 61 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Y Maximum Y Minimum on page 61 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Y Maximum Y Minimum on page 61 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determine
267. w Difference to Previous Slot o m Power vs Slot Bitstream Constellation 0 Parameter B Compensate IQ Onset 1i c iE tei cri eee in A ADR NA ATEENAS 86 Code Power Display edente ornate eec aaaea a Rae Pra ee E gue doen 86 Show Difference to Previous SIL ror or n cec e tre e rena 86 Constellation Parameter B 2 o rtrret Eta erect de teet i vea EC aae epe Te ec EE Dv EP e ae IO Quad out 87 Compensate IQ Offset If enabled the I Q offset is eliminated from the measured signal This is useful to deduct a DC offset to the baseband caused by the DUT thus improving the EVM Note however that for EVM measurements according to standard compensation must be disabled Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 160 Code Power Display For Code Domain Power evaluation Defines whether the absolute power or the power relative to the chosen reference is displayed TOT Relative to the total signal power CPICH Relative to the power of the CPICH Remote command SENSe CDPower PDISplay on page 161 SENSe CDPower PREFerence on page 161 Show Difference to Previous Slot For Power vs Slot evaluation If enabled the slot power difference between the current slot and the previous slot is displayed in the Power vs Slot evaluation Remote command SENSe CDPower PDIFf on page 161 6 3 Code Domain Analysis Se
268. ws see the Operating Basics chapter in the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual Evaluation range You can restrict evaluation to a specific channel frame or slot depending on the evalu ation method See chapter 6 1 Evaluation Range on page 83 e Code Doman Analysis cet eth cet c e on e be e be da eit 11 e Time Alignment Error Measurements cerises nnne eerie rte eec 30 Code Domain Analysis The Code Domain Analysis measurement provides various evaluation methods and result diagrams The code domain power measurements are performed as specified by the 3GPP standards A signal section of approximately 20 ms is recorded for analysis and then searched through to find the start of a 3GPP FDD frame If a frame start is found in the signal the code domain power analysis is performed for a complete frame starting from slot 0 The different evaluations are calculated from the captured I Q data set Therefore it is not necessary to start a new measurement in order to change the evalu ation The 3GPP FDD applications provide the peak code domain error measurement and composite EVM specified by the 3GPP standard as well as the code domain power measurement of assigned and unassigned codes The power can be displayed either for all channels in one slot or for one channel in all slots The composite constellation diagram of the entire signal can also be displayed In addition the symbols demodula ted in a slot their power and t
269. xis for the Composite EVM measurement INIT CONT OFF Stops continuous sweep SWE COUN 100 Set the number of sweeps to be performed to 100 Programming Examples R amp S VSE K72 INIT WAI Start a new measurement with 100 sweeps and wait for the end TRAC2 DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the trace data of the Peak Code Domain Error measurement Result 0 000000000 6 730751038E 001 1 000000000 6 687619019E 001 2 000000000 6 728615570E 001 kesa Table 10 14 Trace results for Peak Code Domain Error measurement Slot number Peak Error 0 6 730751038E 001 1 6 687619019E 001 2 6 728615570E 001 Menu Reference A Reference A 1 A 1 1 A 1 1 1 Menu RefereneG noera aidie n AEE A LACA ETEA AEEA 215 e Reference of Toolbar Functions esssssseseseeeeeseennenenennee emere nennen 219 Menu Reference Most functions in the R amp S VSE are available from the menus e ComimoniR amp s VSE Men s see ie tette eee tee coti n o bert ee dee eene 215 e 3GP FDD Measurements Menus sseesseeeeneee ene ihnen ennn nnn ennn ers s nnne nana 217 Common R amp S VSE Menus The following menus provide basic functions for all applications CM RR ETE m 215 A ANCON MEN E CETERI 216 cu n Cee ree pee eee re OPED pcre OT erere eT Cer rreep tre reePep er er ree reper ce 217 File Menu The File menu includes all functionality directly related to any file
270. y the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query To query the index of a window in a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal IDENtify WINDow command Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values Windowlndex Index number of the window Example LAY WIND IDEN 2 Queries the index of the result display named 2 Response 2 Configuring the Result Display Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel To remove a window for a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal REMove WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY REM 2 Removes the result display in the window named 2 Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the nam
271. yed Evaluation 2d TiraceXesulls 2 2 ertt o ene reat cci acl 182 Symbol Magnitude Error Evalu amp tiOri oie eoi cot eoe ehe Pre pape pets 29 Trace results whet saree De naa CE eur eee t 184 Symbol Phase Error Evaluatio zi Hd e cete e E 29 Trace results 1 ce cire cep ee a reed ta 184 Symbol rate 17 32 Displayed 2 4 9 Relationship to code class 299 Relationship to spreading factor 33 Synchronization Gheck TAE 1 eret Ree rye rere navn rv eren 45 Configuring Remote control 2 ciui e Crede tree ia tr eetepeg ia 141 ecl M M 68 TYPE 68 T T OPPS IM 17 TAE Configuration remote ssssssssseese 117 COMMMOUMING Mec 81 Determining 96 Meas remoehl nsss nasennie 30 Results remote control sess 174 Tail chips Elirnibietitigiss cce cii thee nte tree e iere m error 88 Test models BTS pe 40 Bc M Y 42 Test setup a le M M 41 UE 43 TEC cornes 17 Channel detection Time Alignment Error EC Np 30 Timing OSET isisisi cente tite tede tent ies 12 13 COmMMQUMING sieas ae P T 75 Referente sco etienne dienten e hen t dc E 1 Toolbars PAULO SOT in ne eed y e orca nera est a Control Functions ss

R&S VSE 3GPP FDD User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S VSE 3GPP FDD User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S VSE 3GPP FDD User Manual